Driver Manual PDF

Complete
English
Driver’s Manual
Copying, revision, translation and distribution of this work and all other instances of driver infor-
mation irrespective of form or method is forbidden without written consent from Scania CV AB.
All statutory rights are reserved by Scania CV AB.
The driver’s manual contains relevant information to enable you to operate the vehicle safely and
correctly. In addition, it tells you how to use the equipment included in your vehicle. (In certain
cases, it may also contain information on equipment not found in the vehicle.) Scania assumes that
every person driving a Scania vehicle has familiarised themselves with the content of the associ-
ated Driver’s Manual and (if applicable) agreed to the rights that Scania has reserved. Scania em-
ploys a policy of continual development, and we must therefore reserve the right to make changes
to equipment and technology supplied with the vehicle. For this reason, the information con-
tained in this driver’s manual cannot be called on to support claims resulting from any such
change.
Today ECUs (Electronic Control Units), digital tachographs, FMS systems (Fleet Management
Systems) and other equipment in Scania vehicles can record and store information such as vehicle
specifications, modifications, repairs and the use of the vehicle. This information can be read by
remote download via its wireless communication units or during a workshop visit.
Scania, in its capacity as a manufacturer and original vendor of the vehicle and associated services,
has an interest in processing this type of operational data (either itself or using companies that are
members of Scania’s authorised distribution or workshop network) for three primary purposes:
1. Providing services: The owner of a Scania vehicle can order certain services related to the anal-
ysis and processing of operational data from members of the Scania organisation, allowing the
customer to evaluate its business operations or meet its legal obligations.
2. Enhanced customer benefits: Scania can create an environment that provides the best possible
customer service in its workshops by providing the correct parts information, correct vehicle data,
drawings and the correct information in the information products supplied by Scania.
3. Product development: Scania can benefit its design and engineering work by analysing opera-
tional data from actual conditions, with the objective of improving its products, making them
even more economical and environmentally friendly.
Scania confirms and guarantees that operational data, read and processed in accordance with the
above, will not be transmitted to third parties for any other than the stated purpose, that opera-
tional data will in no way be processed in any way that will impinge on the owner’s competitive-
ness, that no specific data regarding the driver of the vehicle will be processed or identified in a
Scania company’s processing of the operational data (to the extent that the information in general
can be considered to be personal data) and that no driver will be identified in the stored data other
than within the framework of a service that the owner has ordered from a Scania company.
When we use the term Scania workshop, we normally mean an Authorised Scania Workshop. An
Authorised Scania Workshop has been approved by DOS (Scania’s dealer and workshop stand-
ard), which covers a number of different customer services. An authorised workshop is responsible
for carrying out repairs under warranty in accordance with Scania’s warranty stipulations. An Au-
thorised Scania Workshop possesses the training, tools and equipment necessary to diagnose
faults and carry out common repairs on Scania vehicles. When a workshop for some reason is not
able to fulfil its commitments, it is possible to obtain help from Scania Assistance and the respon-
sible distributor. Many other workshops also possess the ability to carry out repairs on Scania ve-
Complete
2017-06-27
hicles and Scania will oblige by supplying at a cost any documentation, training and tools that are
necessary. Scania is not able to assess the competence of these workshops or support them if re-
pairs are not carried out in a proper manner. Scania does not accept responsibility for repairs car-
ried out by these workshops.
Open source (Open Source Notice)
Parts of this software contains files which include open source (open source) licences, which may
require additional rights and obligations for the recipient. These files are supplied as found. A list
of applicable open source (open source) licenses is shown below. During a three year period after
receiving this product you can obtain a copy of the open source of these files by sending a request
to Scania at the following address: ossrequest@scania.com.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Bos-
ton, MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this
license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By
contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and
change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public Li-
cense applies to most of the Free Software Foundation’s software and to any other program whose
authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the
GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Li-
censes are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software
(and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it,
that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you
can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights
or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you
if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give
the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get
the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license
which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands
that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and
Complete
2017-06-27
passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any prob-
lems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors’ reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the dan-
ger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making
the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed
for everyone’s free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICA-

TION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the cop-
yright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The
"Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work con-
taining the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated
into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "mod-
ification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they
are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the
Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of
having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program
does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you receive it, in
any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appro-
priate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this Li-
cense and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of
this License along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer
warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work
based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of
Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the
files and the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or
is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all
third parties under the terms of this License.
Complete
2017-06-27
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause
it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty
(or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Pro-
gram itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based
on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work
are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate
works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you
distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole
which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this
License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and
every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written en-
tirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
collective works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or
with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not
bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object
code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one
of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must
be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for soft-
ware interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a
charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete ma-
chine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sec-
tions 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding
source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Sub-
section b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it.
For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it con-
tains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and
installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need
not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major
components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs,
unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
Complete
2017-06-27
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated
place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as dis-
tribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along
with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided
under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program
is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who
have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated
so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing
else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These ac-
tions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distrib-
uting the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this
License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Pro-
gram or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient au-
tomatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program
subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recip-
ients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by
third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other
reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order,
agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you
from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your
obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-
free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through
you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from
distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance,
the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in
other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right
claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practic-
es. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/do-
nor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee
cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest
of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents
or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this Li-
Complete
2017-06-27
cense may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that
distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License
incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public
License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but
may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number
of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the
terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software
Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose
any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution
conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copy-
righted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free sta-
tus of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software gen-
erally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO

WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICA-
BLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY
AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PRO-
GRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERV-
ICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN

WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY
MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LI-
ABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDEN-
TAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY
TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR
DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR
THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY
OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN AD-
VISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
Complete
2017-06-27
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the
best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change
under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of
each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at
least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the program’s name and a brief idea of what it does.> Copyright (C) <year>
<name of author>
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the
GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRAN-
TY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PAR-
TICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program;
if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA
02110-1301 USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive
mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSO-
LUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type ‘show w’. This is free software, and you are wel-
come to redistribute it under certain conditions; type ‘show c’ for details.
The hypothetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘show c’ should show the appropriate parts of the Gen-
eral Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than ‘show
w’ and ‘show c’; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign
a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program ‘Gnomovision’ (which
makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989 Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary pro-
grams. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking
proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser Gen-
eral Public License instead of this License.
Complete
2017-06-27
RADIO TYPE APPROVAL INFORMATION
Model / FCC ID: L2C0051TR IC: 3432A-0051TR
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio ex-
empts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit
pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélec-
trique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Note: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. The term “IC:” before the radio
certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
Note: This equipment complies with radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled en-
vironment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator and the body of any persons, user or bystander.
Refer to www.scania.com/radio-type-approval-information for additional information.
SIMPLIFIED EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
The radio equipment fitted in the vehicle conforms with the 2014/53/EU Directive. Refer to the
complete text of the EU Declaration of Conformity that is found at the following website:
www.scania.com/radio-type-approval-information
Complete
2017-06-27
Contents
About the Driver’s Manual .............................................1

Read this first.................................................................................1
Feedback to Scania ........................................................................1
Admonitions in the Driver’s Manual ............................................1
Safety................................................................................3
Safety during vehicle maintenance ...............................................3
Danger of fire and explosion.........................................................3
Safety belt ......................................................................................4
Airbag ............................................................................................8
Safety regulations for fire extinguisher.......................................10
Smoke detector............................................................................12
Environment ..................................................................15
Roof air deflector ........................................................................15
Economical driving .....................................................................17
Checking nitrogen oxides ...........................................................23
White smoke limiter ...................................................................25
Handling hazardous substances ..................................................26
Isocyanates...................................................................................26
Scania Euro 6...............................................................................26
Instrument for vehicle information..............................29

Instrument cluster .......................................................................29
Menus in the Display ..................................................................32
Indicator lamps and symbols.......................................................36
Tachograph .................................................................................80
Tachograph .................................................................................86
Wireless download for the tachograph.......................................86
ID button.....................................................................................88
IVD..............................................................................................90
Complete
2017-06-27
Contents
Tyre pressure monitoring ...........................................................92

Driving time and rest time support ............................................97
Hour counter.............................................................................101
Driver environment .....................................................102

Steering wheel ...........................................................................102
Direction indicator and wiper lever..........................................105
Adjusting the collapsible gear lever in the cab .........................109
Ergonomics ...............................................................................110
Fixed seat ...................................................................................112
Seat, basic ..................................................................................113
Seat, middle ...............................................................................114
Seat, premium ...........................................................................115
Folding seat ...............................................................................116
Reclining seat ............................................................................117
Seat heating ...............................................................................117
Extendable ladder......................................................................118
Fixed bed ...................................................................................118
Upper bed..................................................................................119
Kitchen module .........................................................................121
TV preparation .........................................................................125
Electrical socket in cab..............................................................127
Climate system ..........................................................................127
Air horn .....................................................................................137
Sound level control for reverse alarm.......................................137
Rear view mirrors and window winders ...................................138
Rear view mirror heating ..........................................................140
Heated windscreen ....................................................................141
Roof hatch .................................................................................142
Roof hatch .................................................................................143
Auxiliary heater .........................................................................143
Remote control for auxiliary heater..........................................151
Complete
2017-06-27
Contents
App for the remote control of auxiliary heater.........................155

Electric heater ...........................................................................156
Outer storage compartments ....................................................158
Accessories.................................................................................158
Driver assistance system ..............................................159

Hand throttle.............................................................................159
Kick-down .................................................................................161
Acceleration control ..................................................................161
Cruise control............................................................................162
Cruise control with active prediction .......................................163
Eco-roll......................................................................................165
AEB............................................................................................167
Adaptive cruise control .............................................................173
Calibrating the distance sensor.................................................183
Lane departure warning (LDW) ..............................................184
Scania Driver Support...............................................................187
Idling speed adjustment ............................................................193
Adaptive idling ..........................................................................195
Road-holding ...............................................................196
Air suspension ...........................................................................196
Alternative vehicle levels ...........................................................198
Tag axle lift................................................................................199
Load transfer .............................................................................201
Axle weight regulation, tag axle ................................................205
Operation unit for air suspension .............................................207
Manual level control .................................................................212
Mobility ........................................................................215
Selectable front wheel drive ......................................................215
Differential lock ........................................................................217
Complete
2017-06-27
Contents
Low gear in transfer box ...........................................................220

Drive wheel disengagement ......................................................221
ESP ............................................................................................223
Traction Control (TC) .............................................................225
EST............................................................................................229
Gear changing and braking ........................................231

Gear changing ...........................................................................231
Clutch monitoring ....................................................................239
Collapsible gear lever ................................................................240
Opticruise ..................................................................................240
Opticruise ..................................................................................253
Exhaust brake ............................................................................268
Retarder .....................................................................................272
Downhill speed control.............................................................275
Downhill speed control with offset...........................................277
Parking brake ............................................................................279
Trailer brake..............................................................................283
Interlock valve ...........................................................................285
Hill hold ....................................................................................286
Hill start assistance....................................................................288
Automatic neutral position .......................................................290
ABS ............................................................................................290
EBS ............................................................................................292
Lighting ........................................................................297
Standard lighting.......................................................................297
Lighting in the cab ....................................................................301
Rotating beacon ........................................................................314
Locks and alarm ...........................................................315

Central locking..........................................................................315
Complete
2017-06-27
Contents
Central locking and alarm.........................................................319

Starter lock ................................................................................329
Immobiliser ...............................................................................331
Infotainment system....................................................333
Radio..........................................................................................333
Loading and unloading...............................................348

Tail lift.......................................................................................348
Towing unit...............................................................................349
Trailer socket ............................................................................351
Trailer socket ............................................................................355
Compressed air, trailer connection...........................................357
Fifth wheel.................................................................................358
Fifth wheel.................................................................................362
Fifth wheel.................................................................................366
Fifth wheel.................................................................................369
Securing the vehicle on a ferry .................................................373
Checks...........................................................................375
Check points..............................................................................375
Check the brake system for leaks..............................................378
Checking brake chamber stroke length ....................................379
Maintenance ................................................................380
Maintenance programme ..........................................................380
Tool kit......................................................................................380
Front grille panel.......................................................................382
Cab tilting..................................................................................382
External ladder ..........................................................................390
Renewing a bulb ........................................................................391
Complete
2017-06-27
Contents
Wiper blade ...............................................................................402

Engine air cleaner .....................................................................402
Water separating fuel filter .......................................................403
Snow protection air intake ........................................................406
Radiator blind............................................................................408
Regeneration of the particulate filter........................................411
Draining the compressed air tanks ...........................................414
Disc brake..................................................................................416
Internal cleaning........................................................................419
External cleaning.......................................................................421
Tyres and rims...........................................................................425
Changing wheels .......................................................................432
Touching up paintwork ............................................................438
Waxing and polishing ...............................................................439
Wheel chocks ............................................................................439
Emergencies .................................................................441
Emergency exit..........................................................................441
Emergency kit ...........................................................................442
Warning triangle .......................................................................442
Towing and recovery ................................................................442
Shunting ....................................................................................452
Detaching the propeller shaft ...................................................453
Release the parking brake without compressed air ..................459
Chassis lifting points .................................................................462
Filler nipple for parking brake circuit.......................................465
Electrical system...........................................................467
Fuses and relays .........................................................................467
Batteries .....................................................................................493
Batteries .....................................................................................500
Battery master switch ................................................................503
Complete
2017-06-27
Contents
Battery charger ..........................................................................506

Adaptive battery charging .........................................................507
Jump starting .............................................................................508
Jump starting .............................................................................511
Jump socket ...............................................................................516
Bodywork .....................................................................518
EG power take-off.....................................................................518
EK power take-off.....................................................................522
ED power take-off.....................................................................523
Bodybuilding and conversions ..................................................524
Wet kit.......................................................................................526
EXT switch................................................................................527
Operating the platform .............................................................528
Operating the platform .............................................................530
Box truck bodywork ..................................................................533
Oils and fluids ..............................................................540

Engine oil ..................................................................................540
Hydraulic oil..............................................................................540
Checking and topping up engine oil.........................................541
Power steering oil......................................................................545
Automatic chassis lubrication....................................................547
AdBlue .......................................................................................550
Filling clutch fluid .....................................................................556
Coolant ......................................................................................559
Topping up with coolant when expansion tank is empty.........563
Washer fluid ..............................................................................564
Fuels..............................................................................565
Fuel, biodiesel............................................................................565
Fuel heater.................................................................................568
Complete
2017-06-27
Contents
The fuel system .........................................................................570

Raised idling speed ....................................................................571
Bleed the fuel system.................................................................572
Contaminants in the fuel...........................................................582
Technical data..............................................................585
Type plate..................................................................................585
Pressure in brake system ...........................................................585
Tyre pressure.............................................................................586
Complete
2017-06-27
About the Driver’s Manual

Read this first
Read the entire Driver’s Manual thoroughly before driving the
vehicle. Always follow the admonitions and instructions given.
The Driver’s Manual tells you what you need to know about the
vehicle to be able to drive it without risking damage to the
vehicle or injury to yourself or others.
The vehicle settings described in the Driver’s Manual may differ
from the settings in your vehicle.
It also covers vehicle maintenance and how to carry out minor
repairs. For more information on repairs, refer to Scania’s
workshop literature.
Feedback to Scania
Contact your dealer if you have views on the content of this
Driver’s Manual. The dealer can help you make a report to the
Scania factory. Scania is thankful for all suggestions regarding
improvements, as we continuously strive to make the Driver’s
Manual as user-friendly as possible.
Admonitions in the Driver’s Manual
! WARNING!
This caption is used when there is a risk of

personal injury.
1 Complete
20170627
IMPORTANT!
This caption is used when there is a risk of
material damage to the vehicle or other property.
Note:
This caption is used for certain important
procedures.
Environment
This prompt is used when there is information
which will affect the environment.
Ergonomics
This prompt is used when there is information
which will affect the ergonomics.
Complete
20170627 2
Safety
Safety
Safety during vehicle maintenance
Work performed on the vehicle, such as inspection and service
or repairs, must be carried out by someone who has a very good
understanding of the work involved in order to avoid any risk of
personal injury or damage to property and the environment. If in
doubt, contact your Scania workshop.
When working indoors with the engine running, provide
adequate ventilation or use an exhaust extraction unit.
Always have a margin of safety when danger is involved. Protect
yourself as well as others. Don’t take risks!
Danger of fire and explosion

Avoid open fires, welding and suchlike when close to substances
that are combustible and explosive, such as oil and diesel fuel oil.
Flammable material
If your load consists of flammable material which can come into
contact with hot parts of the vehicle during loading and
unloading, you must remove any spillage before driving off.
Clean thoroughly to reduce the risk of fire.
The following parts on the vehicle normally become hot when
driving: exhaust pipe, exhaust manifold, exhaust end pipe,
turbocharger and silencer.
Examples of flammable materials are wood chips, bark, shredded
paper and grain.
3 Complete
20170627
Safety
Safety belt
The protection provided by the belt is best if the waist strap is
worn low over the hips. The diagonal strap should be positioned
as far in on the shoulder as possible without coming too close to
your neck. Make sure the belt is not twisted or chafing against
any sharp edges.
The belt must not be slack at any point. Check especially
thoroughly if you are wearing bulky clothes.
! WARNING!
To reduce the risk of injury in a collision, the

driver and passengers should always use safety
belts when in motion.
Safety belt and child car seat
! WARNING!
A child must always wear its own safety belt.

Without its own safety belt, the risk increases for
the child to receive serious injuries in connection
with powerful braking or collision.
Complete
20170627 4
Safety
• Children shorter than 135 cm must use a car seat.

Without a car seat, the risk of serious injuries increases
in connection with powerful braking or collision. Baby
car seats must be used for children who are not able to
sit upright on their own.
Note:
Scania’s passenger seats are not tested for child or
baby car seats. The use of a child or baby car seat
is therefore done at your own risk.
Seat belts and pregnancy

Pregnant women must always wear a safety belt. Remember:
• The lap strap must be worn as low as possible, below the
stomach.
• The shoulder strap must go over the chest. It must not be

worn across the stomach.
! WARNING!
If the seatbelt is not fastened correctly, sudden

breaking or a collision could potentially cause the
seatbelt to dig into the stomach, resulting in
serious injury to both the baby and the mother.
5 Complete
20170627
Safety
To increase the protection for the driver, the safety belt is

equipped with a belt pretensioner. The belt pretensioner is
always activated in the event of a heavy frontal collision and
reduces forward body movement. The belt pretensioner also
releases if the vehicle rolls over, but not if it is hit from the side
or in the case of minor collisions.
After the collision
! WARNING!
The safety belt, belt pretensioner and other

constituent parts must be inspected after each
collision.
Even safety belts and components that are not
used in the collision must be inspected and
renewed if they show signs of damage or other
defects.
Scania recommends renewing all component parts of the safety

belts that have been used in a collision. Renewal is not necessary
after a minor collision when a Scania workshop cannot find any
damage and considers the function to be fault-free.
Complete
20170627 6
Safety
Scrapping
! WARNING!
Belt pretensioners must be disposed of in a safe

manner before scrapping the vehicle.
Symbols in the instrument cluster

b374042
Yellow symbol.
The symbol may be displayed if the belt pretensioner has been

deployed.
When the symbol lights up while you are driving, a fault has
occurred. This fault may mean that the belt pretensioner will not
be activated in a collision. The belt pretensioner must then be
checked immediately by a Scania workshop.
The normal safety belt function will work even if the symbol is
displayed.
Fault codes
If there is a fault on the belt pretensioner, fault codes are
generated. For more information on how to view the fault codes,
refer to the section IVD.
7 Complete
20170627
Safety
Airbag
! WARNING!
In particular, it is important to wear the safety

belt in vehicles fitted with airbag or curtain
airbag. This is to ensure the correct sitting
position if the airbag or curtain airbag inflates.
Airbag in steering wheel

The airbag is triggered during a frontal collision to protect the
driver.
The crash safety system detects

that the vehicle has collided and
b357973
deploys the airbag.
Complete
20170627 8
Safety
Curtain airbags
b376010
The curtain airbags are located behind the panel above the door
and release if the vehicle has a frontal collision or overturns.
The curtain airbags prevent you from, among other things,
falling out of the cab or hitting your head in a collision or when
overturning.
! WARNING!
Equipment must not be fitted to the inner roof of

the vehicle, door pillars or side panels. This can
lead to impaired protection.
9 Complete
20170627
Safety

b374042
Yellow symbol.
A yellow symbol comes on if a fault has occurred in the system.

The fault may mean that the airbag is not triggered during a
collision. Contact a Scania workshop for checking.
Safety regulations for fire

extinguisher
Please read these instructions carefully and pass on the
information to other possible users of the fire extinguisher. This
should be done before it is placed/mounted in position, or
before it is used for the first time. The fire extinguisher needs to
be turned every three months so that the powder in the fire
extinguisher does not shrink. Information on how to use the fire
extinguisher is found on the fire extinguisher label.
• If possible, provide users with information about how to
use the fire extinguisher and explain the risks of misuse.
Keep children away from fire extinguishers.
• Do not aim the jet of extinguishing medium directly at

someone. Keep a safety distance of at least 1 metre when
extinguishing burning clothes on a person.
Complete
20170627 10
Safety
• Only skilled service technicians trained in accordance

with local legislation may open and carry out
maintenance on the fire extinguisher.
• The fire extinguisher may be pressurised. Do not expose

it to force from outside and do not use force to open it.
• Allow a skilled service engineer to depressurise damaged

or rusty fire extinguishers or fittings. This must be done
before the fire extinguisher is taken to a waste disposal
company.
• It is not permitted to make any modifications, e.g.

welding or soldering, to the fire extinguisher.
• Keep the fire extinguisher clean. Do not use any strong

detergents, just clean it with a damp cloth.
• The fire extinguisher should only be used as a fire

extinguisher container.
• Do not expose it to direct sunlight or to the effects of the

sun.
• Always secure the fire extinguisher properly in the

vehicle. It must be secured in special holders so that it
cannot be damaged by the vehicle’s vibrations and
movement, or fall out of its holders.
• Never hand over the fire extinguisher to third parties

without giving them these instructions.
11 Complete
20170627
Safety
Data on operational use of the fire

extinguisher including extinguishing
medium (user data)
Operating temperature range refer to instructions on the

(related to extinguishing fire extinguisher label
medium):
Nominal operating pressure refer to instructions on the

(continuous pressure fire extinguisher label
extinguisher) at +20°C:
The information stated on the extinguisher label concerning

operating range, nominal operating pressure, quantity of
extinguishing medium and propellant gas pressure applies to a
fully operational fire extinguisher including extinguishing
medium.
The label may be located on the fire extinguisher or in the
Driver’s information folder.
Smoke detector
The smoke alarm is triggered when it detects smoke particles.
The smoke alarm can react to particles in cigarette smoke and to
some extent to dust.
Complete
20170627 12
Safety
The button flashes at 45 second intervals during normal

operation. The alarm starts at a lower noise level and increases
after approximately 50 seconds to a higher noise level.
IMPORTANT!
The external environment affects the service life
of the smoke alarm.
The smoke alarm is located above the door on the

b337990
driver side or in the ceiling on the driver side.
Checking the smoke alarm
IMPORTANT!
Check that the smoke alarm is working at least
once a week and always after holidays or any other
extended period of absence.
To check that the smoke alarm is working, hold down the button
for 5-10 seconds. The alarm should then sound and the button
should flash for as long as it is pressed.
13 Complete
20170627
Safety
Note:
After the check, the smoke alarm is set
automatically to timer mode.
If the alarm goes off for no reason, this may be because the smoke
alarm is dirty. The smoke alarm must then be renewed.
The smoke alarm should always be checked during servicing in
the workshop.
Timer function
Since the alarm can also be triggered for reasons other than
smoke from a fire, there is a timer function which allows the
driver to switch off the smoke alarm temporarily. The function
can be used when smoking. Briefly pressing the button switches
off the smoke alarm for 10 minutes. This can also be done when
the alarm has gone off. The button flashes at 10 second intervals
when in timer mode.
Renewing the battery

When it is time to renew the battery, the button flashes and the
smoke alarm chirps at 45 second intervals. This alarm signal is
triggered approximately one month before the battery is
completely flat. The battery lasts for 1-2 years depending on the
number of alarms and periods of high temperatures. The smoke
alarm takes a 9-volt battery, type 6R61, 6LR61 or 1604 A.
Complete
20170627 14
Environment
Environment
Roof air deflector
Crank for adjusting roof air

b383958
deflector.
An optimum setting of the roof air deflector is important as it has

a great effect on the fuel consumption.
Note:
An incorrectly adjusted roof air deflector has an
exceptionally negative effect on the fuel
consumption. Scania recommends that you
contact your Scania workshop for help with the
optimal setting.
If a Scania workshop cannot help with the optimum adjustment,

a temporary adjustment of the roof air deflector can be made.
This can e.g. apply to tractors that change semi-trailers several
times a week. A temporary adjustment should only be made in
15 Complete
20170627
Environment
exceptional cases due to the negative effect on the fuel

consumption,
Rules of thumb for temporary adjustment of the roof air

deflector:
• If possible, get the assistance of an extra person for

simpler adjustments.
• Aim to get the air flowing from the roof air deflector to
flow a little above the front edge of the trailer or
bodywork.
• It is better to set the roof air deflector too high in relation

to the trailer than the opposite. A roof air deflector set
too low will give a higher fuel consumption than one set
too high.
Complete
20170627 16
Environment
1 2
b384295
1. Optimum setting of the roof air 3. Too low setting of the roof air
deflector. deflector.
2. Too high setting of the roof air
deflector.
Contact a Scania workshop for adjusting the air deflector.
Economical driving
Your vehicle affects the environment

In order to improve fuel economy and reduce exhaust emissions,
Scania is constantly striving to increase engine efficiency and
reduce the air/rolling resistance of vehicles. It is nevertheless
inevitable that your vehicle and your driving will affect the
environment.
17 Complete
20170627
Environment
Exhaust gases contain, for example, carbon dioxide, nitrogen

oxides and hydrocarbons.
• Carbon dioxide emissions contribute to the greenhouse
effect, and are regarded as being the environmental
problem which is most difficult to overcome.
• Nitrogen oxides contribute to the acidification of soil and

water and to eutrophication.
• Hydrocarbons and nitrogen oxides help to form ground

level ozone which is harmful to human life, animals and
plants.
Drive economically and reduce the

environmental impact
The most important aspect of economical driving is a long-term,
permanent fuel saving. The less fuel your vehicle consumes, the
less exhaust gases it emits. It is therefore possible to save money
and the environment by reducing fuel consumption. The main
factors affecting the fuel consumption are your driving and the
condition of the vehicle.
Your driving
• Plan ahead when driving so that you avoid large
variations in speed.
Complete
20170627 18
Environment
• Economical driving with good forward planning and

greater use of the vehicle’s kinetic energy can reduce the
fuel consumption by 10%.
• Use the retarder and exhaust brake to save the wheel

brakes.
• A preheated engine is subject to less wear when starting

than a cold engine.
• Run the engine at idling speed for approximately 1

minute after driving before switching off the engine.
Otherwise there is a risk of the turbocharger being
damaged.
Vehicle condition
• A well-serviced engine and fuel system give good
efficiency. In the long run it is always more expensive to
neglect vehicle maintenance than to observe the
recommended service intervals. A vehicle that is well
looked after is always more economical in operation
than one that is neglected and poorly maintained.
• The vehicle’s service life and fuel economy are improved

if the vehicle is kept in good condition.
19 Complete
20170627
Environment
Note:
A clean air filter considerably reduces the fuel
consumption.
Economy gear ratio

If your vehicle has economy gear ratio, it will have an engine
speed of approx. 1,200 rpm at cruising speed. The low engine
speed means that you save fuel. It may require rather more gear
changes.
If your vehicle is equipped with overdrive, you can drive in 11th
gear at cruising speed with a heavy load, such as on hilly terrain
or when the vehicle is fully laden. You will have better pulling
power and will not need so many gear changes.
If your vehicle is equipped with Opticruise you should drive in
automatic mode to obtain the best fuel economy and driving
comfort.
Tyres
• Insufficient pressure in the tyres increases the rolling
resistance and therefore also the fuel consumption. In
addition, the tyres rapidly become worn and this also
affects safety when driving. Incorrect tyre pressure can
increase fuel consumption by up to 5%.
Complete
20170627 20
Environment
Note:
Check the tyre pressure frequently. Carry out the
check when the tyres are cold.
• Choose the correct tyres to suit your driving. If you use

energy tyres, the fuel consumption is reduced by 4-6%.
An unnecessarily deep tread leads to greater rolling
resistance.
• Make sure that the rims and tyres on double-mounted

wheels are the same type and size.
Air resistance
• The air resistance is affected by the road speed. If the
road speed is doubled, the air resistance increases by a
factor of four. As the height and width of the vehicle
increases, its air resistance also increases. This also
applies if there are roof racks and other protruding
objects on the vehicle.
• By adapting the bodywork and decreasing the height by

0.4 m, it is possible to save 2 litres of fuel per 100 km at a
speed of 80 km/h.
• Flat surfaces to covers and loads are important.
• The setting of the air deflector is important. An incorrect

setting increases the fuel consumption by 4-5%.
21 Complete
20170627
Environment
Driving hints
• You get the highest pulling power and cheapest operation
at engine speeds of between 1,000 and 1,600 rpm.
IMPORTANT!
Do not overrev as it increases fuel consumption.
Driving in the red zone can damage the engine.
• Before changing up, accelerate just enough to keep the

engine speed after gear change at about 1,000 rpm.
• Before changing down, let the engine speed drop to about

1,000 rpm. Avoid changing gear if the engine can
manage anyway.
• Make use of the kinetic energy. Release the accelerator

pedal before a stop or on a downhill slope and roll
forward.
IMPORTANT!
Allow the gear to engage and do not declutch.
This is to avoid damaging the gearbox.
• Drive as smoothly as possible and maintain the vehicle

speed. Increased vehicle speed leads to increased fuel
consumption.
Complete
20170627 22
Environment
• Avoid unnecessary idling.
For more information, refer to the Menus in the display section.
Checking nitrogen oxides

Note:
Driving a vehicle that emits more nitrogen oxides
in the exhaust gases than intended could violate
national legislation. This could also mean that
the conditions for national tax and duty relief will
not be met. Comply with national legislation.
The purpose of check the amount of nitrogen oxides in the

exhaust gases is to ensure that the vehicle does not emit more
nitrogen oxides than intended. In general, national legislation
specifies requirements for nitrogen oxide emissions as well as
what measures must be taken if permitted limits are exceeded.
Display messages
Symbol for exceeded nitrogen oxide levels in the

b374114
exhaust gases.
A warning and a fault message is displayed in the instrument

cluster when:
• There is a fault in the nitrogen oxide control system.
23 Complete
20170627
Environment
• The vehicle emits more nitrogen oxides in the exhaust

gases than intended.
Once 50 hours of operating time have elapsed since the warning

was first lit, engine power is limited by 40%. The number of
hours remaining before engine power is limited is displayed in
the instrument cluster. The limitation is activated once time has
run out and the vehicle has been stopped.
Display messages

b374114
exhaust gases.

cluster when:

Once 36 hours of operating time have elapsed since the warning

was first lit, engine power is limited by 40%. The number of
hours remaining before engine power is limited is displayed in
the instrument cluster. The limitation is activated the first time
the vehicle is started after the time has run out.
Complete
20170627 24
Environment
Display messages

b374114
exhaust gases.

cluster when:

White smoke limiter

The white smoke limiter makes the engine emit cleaner exhaust
gases and maintain the correct operating temperature.
The white smoke limiter can, for example, be used when you
want to heat up the cooling system and cab by running at idle.
When the engine has become too hot, the white smoke limiter is
automatically switched off.
Remember that the white smoke limiter increases the exhaust

noise somewhat and therefore should be used with caution at
night.
The white smoke limiter settings are made in the instrument

cluster. Use the OK button to navigate the display menu. You
can find the selection under Settings. For more information, refer
to the Menus in Display section.
25 Complete
20170627
Environment
Handling hazardous substances

Coolant, engine oil, hydraulic oil and similar substances are not
to be discharged into the sewage system or on the ground.
! WARNING!
Refrigerant may only be handled by authorised

personnel.
Isocyanates
Isocyanates are used, e.g. in some paints, putties, glues and
plastic foams. Inhalation of isocyanates in the form of vapour,
dust or aerosol may cause irritation of mucous membranes with
asthmatic symptoms from the respiratory passages and produce
an impairment of lung function. Even short exposures may cause
lasting hypersensitivity.
When products containing bound-in isocyanates are heated,
these may be set free. This applies to grinding, welding, cutting,
etc. Therefore, provide for adequate ventilation in the working
area. Air-fed respirators should be used.
Scania Euro 6
The vehicle is certified for Euro 6 emission requirements. In
order for the vehicle to work optimally and to comply with Euro
6, the driver must care for the vehicle as prescribed in Scania’s
recommendations. This applies during driving and during
regular maintenance.
Complete
20170627 26
Environment
As part of Euro 6 certification, vehicle emissions must be

checked automatically during operation and different limitations
must be activated if the vehicle does not comply with the
requirements of Euro 6.
Driver inducement system

The driver inducement system monitors faults which may result
in raised emissions of nitrogen oxides and particles. In addition,
it monitors attempts to prevent or affect the exhaust gas
aftertreatment system.
When a fault is registered, a warning symbol is displayed
together with fault information in the instrument cluster. All
diagnostic information for emissions is saved in the control
system and can be read later using a diagnostic tool.
Fuel grade
The sulphur content in the fuel must not exceed 10 ppm
(0.001%). A higher content could damage the engine and
emission control.
For more information, refer to the section Fuel, diesel.
Particulate filter
Scania Euro 6 includes a particulate filter, which reduces the
quantity of particles in the exhaust gases. Occasionally, it may be
27 Complete
20170627
Environment
necessary to activate a regeneration of the particulate filter

manually.
Engine power is limited if the particulate filter is excessively full.
For more information, refer to the section Regeneration of the
particulate filter.
b374138
Symbol for regeneration of the particulate filter.
AdBlue
Scania Euro 6 includes emission control technology – SCR –
which reduces the amount of nitrogen oxides in the exhaust
gases. Ensure that the SCR system remains functional by
topping up AdBlue regularly.
If the vehicle AdBlue tank is empty or the SCR system has been
damaged, the engine power and speed of the vehicle are limited.
Refer to the AdBlue section for more information.
b374137
Symbol for exhaust gas aftertreatment with AdBlue.
Complete
20170627 28
Instrument for vehicle information
Instrument for vehicle

information
Instrument cluster
2 3 4
1 5
9
6
b364746
7 8
1. Speedometer 6. Fuel level gauge

2. Direction indicator 7. Indicator lamps and warning
3. Display symbols
4. General warning symbols and 8. Coolant temperature gauge

indication symbols. 9. Display right, shows the AdBlue
5. Tachometer level, outdoor temperature and
clock.
29 Complete
20170627
1 2 3 4 5
6 8
b364745
7
1. Speedometer 6. Fuel level gauge

2. Direction indicator 7. Indicator lamps and warning
3. Display symbols
4. General warning symbols and 8. Display right, shows the AdBlue

indication symbols. level, outdoor temperature and
clock. Coolant temperature gauge
5. Tachometer
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per
minute, rpm.
The tachometer has 4 fields:
• White, 0-2,000 rpm and 2,200-2,400 rpm.
• Blue, 2,000-2,400 rpm. The engine auxiliary brake is

strongest here.
Complete
20170627 30
• Red, above 2,400 rpm. If the engine speed is in the red

zone, there is a risk of damage to the engine.
Display
1 2
1. Field A
2. Field B
3 4 3. Field C
b364925
4. Field D
The are 4 selectable fields in the display. You can select which
function you want to see in each field. Navigate to a function,
click the OK button and select in which field the display will be
shown. Delete a field by clicking the OK button, select delete
field and then select which field is to be deleted.
31 Complete
20170627
Display
1 b364924
1. Selectable field.
There is 1 selectable field in the display. You can select which

function you want to see in the field. Navigate to a function, click
the OK button and select insert in field. Delete the field by
clicking the OK button and select delete field.
Menus in the Display
Navigating in the instrument cluster

Use the switches on the right-hand side of the steering wheel to
navigate in the instrument cluster.
1. Menu navigation
3 1 2. OK button
3. Back button
4
b364744
2 4. Quick selection
Complete
20170627 32
Main menus
The are 5 main menus in the instrument cluster.
b364743
1. Vehicle information 4. Media
2. Trip information 5. Settings
3. Instantaneous data
Vehicle information
b364742
Under the vehicle information menu you can find information

about the following:
• Differential locks
• Level adjustment
• Load display
• Tyre pressure
33 Complete
20170627
Trip information
b363515
Under the trip information menu you can find information

• Cruise control
• Trip meter
• Fuel average
• Fuel overview
• Running hours
• Driving score
• Drive and rest times
Instantaneous data
b364740
Under the instantaneous data menu you can find information

• Brake and oil pressure
Complete
20170627 34
• Fuel level
• Fuel consumption
• Oil temperature
• Battery voltage
Media
b364739
Under the media menu you can find information about the
following:
• Media information
• Phone status
• Contacts
• Navigation
Settings
b364738
35 Complete
20170627
Under the settings menu you can find information about the
following:
• Start-up check
• Functions
• Auxiliary heater
• Auxiliary trip meter
• Vehicle
• Display
• Information.
• Language
− To make it easy to change language, the language

selection is always last under the Settings menu.
Indicator lamps and symbols

The red or yellow warning lamp lights up if there is a fault on
the vehicle. Texts and symbols in the display or indicator lamps
in the instrument cluster indicate the fault that has occurred.
A red warning is displayed. The warning lights up red

b374039
even when it has been acknowledged.
Complete
20170627 36
A yellow warning is displayed. The warning lights up

b374038
yellow even when it has been acknowledged.
Information levels
The information in the instrument cluster is displayed in 3 levels.
Red
Red means a risk of serious injuries or death, or damage to the

vehicle or other property. You must take appropriate action
immediately.
Yellow
Yellow means that something on the vehicle is in a state which

risks damaging the vehicle. Rectify the fault as quickly as
possible. Yellow information can also mean that an active
function requires extra attention.
White, blue, green
White, blue and green show information from a function that is

operating normally.
List
Read what the information means in the relevant section of the
Driver’s Manual. Some symbols are displayed along with an
37 Complete
20170627
acoustic signal. The acoustic signal only sounds when the engine
is running.
Lights up blue
b374035
Main beam is on.
Lights up yellow
Rear foglamp is on.

b374068
Lights up yellow with acoustic signal
The headlamp rotary control is in the

b374093
dipped beam or position lamp position

when the voltage is switched off.
Lights up yellow
Main or dipped beam fault.

b374093
Action: Check whether a bulb is

defective. For more information, refer to
the section Renewing a bulb. Contact a
Scania workshop if the fault persists.
Complete
20170627 38
b374078 Lights up red
Fault in the charging circuit.
Action: Stop the vehicle as soon as

possible. Switch off the engine. Contact
a Scania workshop.
Lights up yellow
b374136
Exhaust gas aftertreatment system

working.
Action: Do not switch off the battery

master switch until the symbol has gone
out.
Lights up red
Gas leakage.
b374141

possible. Switch off the engine. For
more information, refer to the section
Vehicle gas and safety.
39 Complete
20170627
Lights up yellow
Extremely low or high tyre pressure.

b374112
Action: Stop the vehicle and correct the

tyre pressure. For more information,
refer to the section Tyre pressure
monitoring.
Lights up white
Tyre pressure low.

b374112
Lights up white
b374113
Maintenance should be carried out.
Lights up white
Low level in the washer fluid tank.

b374087
Lights up red, with or without acoustic

signal
b374041
The driver’s safety belt is not fastened.
Complete
20170627 40
Lights up yellow
– The belt pretensioner or airbag has

b374042
been deployed or
– Fault in the crash safety system.
Action: Contact a Scania workshop.
Lights up yellow
The tool hatch is open.

b374108
Lights up yellow
Immobiliser fault.
b374040
Lights up red
The instrument cluster has no contact

b388694
with the control units with which it

should be communicating.

possible. Check the fuses. Contact a
41 Complete
20170627
Lights up yellow
Fault in the instrument cluster.

b383384
Lights up red
Fault in the instrument cluster.

b383384

possible. Contact a Scania workshop.
Lights up yellow
– No card or paper in the tachograph or

b201938
– Fault in the tachograph.
Action: For more information, refer to

the section Tachograph.
Lights up yellow
b201945
Lighting system fault.
Action: Stop the vehicle. Check the fuses

and the battery master switch. Contact a
Complete
20170627 42
Coordinator fault or a fault affecting the

coordinator.

possible. Check the fuses. Contact a
Lights up yellow
b200353
The coordinator has not been

programmed.
Action: Stop the vehicle. Contact a

Scania workshop.
Lights up red
Electric cab tilting is still activated.

b373651
Action: Deactivate before starting off.
43 Complete
20170627
Lights up red while driving
Brake pressure in the parking brake

b374067
circuit is too low and it is starting to be

applied.

Flashes red with an acoustic signal
The parking brake is not applied and the

b374067
ignition has been switched off or the

door opened.
Flashes red
Serious fault in the parking brake.

b374067
Lights up red
The parking brake is applied.

b374067
Lights up green
Autohold is activated and the parking

b374067
brake is not applied.
Complete
20170627 44
Lights up red with an acoustic signal
The brake pressure is too low, which

b200343
means the braking performance may be

considerably impaired.

Lights up red
Fault on the vehicle electronic brake

b200343
system (EBS) or the brake pressure in

the circuit for the parking and trailer
brake is too low.

45 Complete
20170627
Lights up yellow
– Fault which affects the brake system or

b200343
– The vehicle has full braking effect, but

not full EBS functionality or
– The brake discs are too hot or
– Fault on the air processing system

(APS), or
– High air consumption in the brake

system.
Lights up yellow
– Critical air consumption in the

b203192
pneumatic system.
Action: Check for any leaks over the

entire road train. Contact a Scania
workshop for checking.
Complete
20170627 46
Lights up white
High air consumption in the pneumatic

b203192
system.
Action: Check at the next workshop

visit.
Lights up yellow
– The brake linings are worn or

b374077
– Fault in brake lining wear sensors.
Lights up green
The retarder is activated.

b200303
Lights up yellow
b200357
Retarder fault; no retarder braking

available.
47 Complete
20170627
b374075 Lights up yellow
High oil temperature in retarder.
Action: Contact a Scania workshop for

checking.
Lights up yellow
– Fault on vehicle anti-lock brake system

b374080
(ABS), or
– One or more wheel hubs are

abnormally hot.
Lights up yellow
Fault on trailer anti-lock brake system

b208677
(ABS) – only applies at speeds over 10

km/h.
Lights up white
There are no anti-lock brakes (ABS) on

the trailer attached to the vehicle.
b208676
Complete
20170627 48
Lights up red
Low brake pressure in the trailer brake

b208579
system.

possible. Check connections to the
trailer. Contact a Scania workshop.
Lights up white
The trailer brake has been applied via

b208579
the trailer brake switch.
Lights up white
Hill hold will be released soon.

b373612
49 Complete
20170627
Lights up red while driving

b374064
Insufficient oil pressure which will

quickly damage the vehicle.

possible. Switch off the engine. Check
the engine oil level. Contact a Scania
workshop if the fault persists.
Lights up yellow
b374064
The oil pressure in the engine is too low

or too high. Along with the symbol
there may be a counter which indicates
the time remaining until the situation
becomes critical. Risk of engine damage.
Action: Check the engine oil level.

Contact a Scania workshop if the fault
persists.
Lights up yellow
The engine oil level is too high or too

b208581
low.
Action: Check the oil level.
Complete
20170627 50
Lights up white
Vehicle speed is limited.

b216152
There may be a counter associated with

the symbol. The counter indicates how
much time remains until speed
limitation is activated.
Lights up white
b374140
Engine power is limited.
There may be a counter associated with

the symbol. The counter indicates how
much time remains until power
limitation is activated.
Lights up red
b200352
Serious engine fault.

possible. Switch off the engine. Contact
a Scania workshop.
51 Complete
20170627
– Engine fault or
– The battery master switch was

switched off too soon last time it was
used or
– The battery master switch was

switched off before the ignition 10 times
in a row.

the section Battery master switch. Contact
a Scania workshop if the fault persists.
Flashes yellow
b374114
A flashing engine symbol indicates that

the nitrogen oxide check is working. For
Checking nitrogen oxides.
Complete
20170627 52
Risk that the level of contaminants in

the exhaust gases emitted by the vehicle
will be too high. In some cases the
engine power is limited and in some
cases the vehicle speed is also limited.
Action: Pay attention to the messages in

the instrument cluster display. For more
information, refer to the section
Lights up yellow
Low coolant level in the expansion tank.

b374060
Lights up red
The coolant temperature is too high.

b374063
Action: Reduce the engine load. For

Coolant.
53 Complete
20170627
Lights up yellow
The starter motor has overheated.

b213330
Action: The starter motor must rest for

at least 5 minutes before the next
attempt to start it. For more
information, refer to the section Jump
starting.
Lights up yellow
The engine air filter cartridge is blocked

b213055
and must be renewed.
Action: Renew the air filter cartridge.

Refer to section Engine air cleaner for
more information.
Lights up white
The air filter cartridge is starting to get

b213055
clogged.
Action: Check the air filter cartridge at

the next workshop visit. Refer to section
Engine air cleaner for more information.
Complete
20170627 54
The particulate filter is excessively full

and engine power is limited.
Action: Contact a Scania workshop. For

Regeneration of the particulate filter.
Lights up yellow
b374138
The particulate filter is full.
Action: Carry out manual regeneration.

For more information, refer to the
section Regeneration of the particulate
filter.
Lights up white
b374138
The particulate filter is starting to

become full.

section Regeneration of the particulate
filter.
55 Complete
20170627
Lights up yellow
– Low level in AdBlue tank or

b374137
– SCR system fault.
Lights up yellow
Risk that the level of contaminants in

b374137
the exhaust gases emitted by the vehicle

will be too high. In some cases, engine
power is limited and in some cases
vehicle speed is also limited.

the instrument cluster display. Fill with
reductant. For more information, refer
to the section AdBlue. Contact a Scania
workshop if the fault persists.
Lights up yellow
High exhaust gas temperature.

b374151
Lights up yellow
Low fuel level.

b374110
Complete
20170627 56
Lights up yellow
Low level of AdBlue in the AdBlue tank.

b374072
Lights up white
Engine shutdown activated.

b374062
Lights up yellow
Low fluid level in clutch.

b374142
Lights up yellow while driving
Unintended clutch slippage.

b374059
The engine power is temporarily

reduced for some engine types.
57 Complete
20170627
Lights up yellow at start-up
The clutch has been exposed to

b374059
unnecessary wear.
Lights up white
Information about the gearbox.

b374109
Lights up yellow
Fault on the gearbox.

b374155

the instrument cluster display. Contact a
Scania workshop for checking.
Lights up yellow
High oil temperature in gearbox.

b374074
Low power steering oil level.

b353252
Complete
20170627 58
Lights up white
The adaptive cruise control is active.

b383383
Lights up white
The adaptive cruise control is in the

b383382
pause mode.
Lights up yellow
The adaptive cruise control does not

b374090
work.
Lights up white with an acoustic signal
Adaptive cruise control has been

b374090
switched off automatically.
Lights up yellow
Limited or deactivated AEB.

b377314
Action: Activate AEB or clean in front of

the camera or radar. For more
information, refer to the section AEB.
59 Complete
20170627
Lights up yellow
– Blocked camera, or
b364578
– Defective camera.
Action: In case of a blocked camera,

clean in front of the camera. In case of a
defective camera, contact a Scania
workshop.
Lights up white
Blocked radar.
b364581
Action: Clean in front of the radar.
Lights up red with an acoustic signal
Collision warning.
b374154
Action: Apply the brakes.
Lights up yellow
The lane departure warning (LDW)

b374091
does not work.
Action: Contact a Scania workshop for

checking.
Complete
20170627 60
Lights up white
Downhill speed control indicator.

b373608
Flashes yellow
– The vehicle’s Electronic Stability

b357932
Programme (ESP) is active, or
– Traction Control (TC) is active or
– The trailer’s Electronic Stability

Programme (ESP) is active.

sections ESP and Traction Control (TC).
Lights up yellow
– Fault on the vehicle’s Electronic

b357932
Stability Programme (ESP) or
– Traction Control (TC) is completely

or partially switched off.

the sections ESP and Traction Control
(TC). Contact a Scania workshop for
checking.
61 Complete
20170627
Lights up white
Reduced functionality on the Electronic

b357932
Stability Programme (ESP).

section ESP.
Lights up yellow
Traction Control (TC) is in off-road

b200344
mode or the wheels are allowed to rotate

at different speeds in roller brake test
mode or when washing wheels.

section Traction Control (TC).
Lights up yellow
b384837
All-wheel drive fault.
Lights up yellow
b374066
One or more longitudinal differential

locks are engaged, but no lateral
differential lock.
Complete
20170627 62
b374066 Flashes yellow
One or more lateral differential locks are

engaged.
Also longitudinal differential locks may

be engaged when the symbol flashes.
Lights up white
The transfer gearbox is in neutral.

b383892
Hill driving
Refer to the Scania Driver Support

b363520
section for more information.
Increase the speed before a hill

b363519

Use of brakes
b338032

63 Complete
20170627
b363518 Anticipation

Choice of gears

b363517
Standard mode
b363535
Power mode
b363534
Economy mode
b363533
Off-road mode
b363532
Complete
20170627 64
Standard mode
b363535
Power mode
b363534
Economy mode
b363533
Off-road mode
b363532
Fault in clutch system. 2-pedal mode is

activated but a receipt may be required
depending on the situation.
b377573
Refer to the section If there is a fault on

Opticruise for more information.
65 Complete
20170627
Lights up yellow
– The vehicle is not at normal drive level

b373615
or
– Vehicle level 1 or vehicle level 2 is

activated.
Lights up yellow
b373614
Fault in the air suspension system.
Lights up yellow
Load transfer is activated.

b374065
Lights up yellow
Load transfer is not available; the bogie

b374061
axle differential is not engaged.
Lights up yellow
Load transfer on the trailer is activated.

b374111
Complete
20170627 66
Lights up yellow
The tag axle on the towing vehicle is

b374036
raised.
Lights up yellow
The tag axle on the trailer is raised.

b200301
Lights up yellow
The tag axle lift cannot be used; it may

b374079
cause the driving axle to be overloaded.
Lights up yellow
One or more power take-offs are

b374037
engaged.
Lights up red
Fault in steering circuits 1 and 2, both

b374094
flow and pressure.
67 Complete
20170627
Lights up red
Fault in steering circuit 1. Steering

b200354
circuit 2 is activated automatically.
Lights up yellow
Fault in steering circuit 2.

b200355
Lights up red
Steered tag axle fault (EST).

b200356
Action: Stop the vehicle at the nearest

safe place. Contact a Scania workshop.
section EST.
Lights up yellow
Steered tag axle fault (EST).

b200356
Complete
20170627 68
Lights up red
b327112
Remote controlled trailer coupling open
Lights up yellow
b327113
First axle on the trailer tri-axle bogie lift
Lights up yellow
b327114
Third axle on the trailer tri-axle bogie

lift
Lights up yellow
Bodywork heating activated

b373653
Lights up red
Towing device unlocked

b209611
69 Complete
20170627
b209610 Bodywork unlocked
Fifth wheel unlocked

b209612
Crane extended
b209613
Supporting legs unlocked

b209614
The platform is not in the normal

position.
b373609
Complete
20170627 70
b213676 Tail lift lowered
Lights up yellow
Bodywork warning
b209617
Truck tipper body raised

b373609
Trailer tipper body raised

b209621
Underrun protection raised

b373607
71 Complete
20170627
b373606 Underrun protection lowered
Truck tailboard spreader open

b373628
Trailer tailboard spreader open

b209625
Box body open/unlocked

b373627
Box body raised

b373626
Overload
b209628
Complete
20170627 72
b209629 Maximum trailer angle
Sensor error, foot plate

b209630
Demountable body unlocked

b373625
Platform cover open

b373621
Bodywork temperature outside

threshold values
b213681
73 Complete
20170627
b213682 Trailer steered tag axle locked
Trailer tag axle raised

b213683
Lights up white
Bogie drive roller active

b209632
Plough floating
b373624
Sand spreader active

b209634
Complete
20170627 74
b209635 Sand spreader active
Towing device locked

b209636
Platform locked
b373623
Bodywork locked
b209638
Fifth wheel locked

b374144
Winch active
b209640
75 Complete
20170627
b373620 Bodywork filled
Mixer unit active

b373619
Functions can be controlled from the

outside of the vehicle
b374143
Working lamp active

b373658
Message received
b213687
Shows a red, yellow, green or blue light

The colour of the symbol depends on the vehicle specification.
Complete
20170627 76
Rotating beacon
b387939
Horizontal fifth wheel adjustment

b387940
Vertical fifth wheel adjustment

b387948
Spotlight
b387941
Work light, left-hand

b387942
77 Complete
20170627
b387935 Work light, right-hand
Flashing lights
b387936
Reversing lights
b387937
Level adjustment
b387938
Plough locked
b387933
Sand heating
b387934
Complete
20170627 78
b387952 Snow chains
Box lighting
b387947
Speed limitation
b387949
Door open
b202937
79 Complete
20170627
Tachograph
General
This tachograph records driving time and stationary time. It is a
one-day tachograph and records operational data for maximum
24 hours on each tacho chart. You should therefore change the
tacho chart every day, which can only be done with the vehicle
stationary and the voltage on.
General
This tachograph records driving time and stationary time. It is a
seven-day tachograph and records operational data for maximum
of seven days on each tacho chart. You should therefore change
the tacho chart every week, which can only be done with the
vehicle stationary and the voltage on.
Note:
The fuse for the alarm and tachograph is located
in the battery box.
Complete
20170627 80
1 2 3 4
b209349
5
1. Open the cover. 4. Set the time and show the fault
2. Display. messages.
3. Switch between hours and minutes 5. Tachograph cover.

to set the time or scroll between
fault messages.
1. Date.
1 2
2. Time.
3. Driving time recorded shown while
driving.
4. Chart in tachograph.
6 5 4 3 5. Fault indication.
b209427
6. Total distance driven.
81 Complete
20170627
Tacho chart
1 2
Serial no: 1004758
TO
Current?
Nagot som jag inte ser? xxx/xx
00021F
IP: 138.315 James?

Serie:107 Docka?
A 000
125 km/h
Ingen aning? 5 00 33
004.001M
4 Check that the information at 1

b209453
and 2 matches 3 or 4.
For the tachograph to work correctly, the correct type of tacho

chart must be used. Check that the correct tacho chart is being
used by reading the information at 1 and 2 and comparing it with
3 and 4 on the tacho chart. The information at 1 and 2 should
match the information at 3 or 4. You can view the information at
1 and 2 by opening the hatch and carefully folding it down.
Contact a Scania workshop if you have any questions about what
type of chart you should use in this tachograph.
The previous day’s shift
A new tacho chart should be inserted in the tachograph each day.

Proceed as follows with the vehicle stationary and the power on:
1. Fill in the following information on a new tacho chart:
− Name of driver 1 and 2.
− Place where the shift starts.
− Today’s date.
Complete
20170627 82
− The vehicle’s registration number.
− Distance driven.
2. Check and if necessary set the time.
3. Open the box cover, insert the tacho chart and close the
cover.
4. Check the symbols in the display
At the end of a working day
Proceed as follows with the vehicle stationary and the power on:
1. Open the cover and remove the tacho chart.
2. Close the hatch.
3. Check the recorded driving time and stationary time.
4. Enter the total and day’s distance driven.
Setting the time

You can only set the time when the vehicle is stationary.
Proceed as follows:
1. Press M.
2. Press plus or minus. The minute digits start to flash and

you can set the minutes.
83 Complete
20170627
3. Set the hours by pressing M. The date is automatically

changed if the time 24:00 is passed.
4. Confirm the setting by keeping M depressed for more

than 2 seconds. The main menu is then displayed again.
Note:
The time setting for the tacho chart holder is
automatically updated if the box is empty. If you
have set the clock with the tacho chart inserted,
you must remove the tacho chart and close the
box. The time is updated automatically. You can
then re-insert the tacho chart.
Fault messages
A symbol is displayed in the instrument cluster when a fault has
occurred in the tachograph.
b201938
Fault codes
Fault indication is automatically displayed in the tachograph

display. Fault codes can only be read when the vehicle is
stationary. The codes are shown in the display by pressing the M
Complete
20170627 84
button twice. Scroll through the codes using the plus and minus
buttons.
The time flashes. Fault code

b209412
9053.
The time has been changed with the tacho chart in the
tachograph. Remove the tacho chart and close the cover. Open
the cover, replace the tacho chart and close the cover.
The time flashes. Fault code

b209412
9064.
Fault in the time or fault in the tachograph. Reset the time.

Check also that the tacho chart has been inserted correctly and
that it is not damaged.
The fault symbol has come on.

b209415
Fault code 9060
Faulty tachograph. Open and close the cover once.
The tacho chart symbol (see

arrow) has gone out. Fault code
b209416
A050.
85 Complete
20170627
No chart in the tachograph. Stop the vehicle and insert a tacho

chart.
More fault codes are described in the manufacturer’s manual.
Tachograph
For the tachograph in this vehicle, refer to the manufacturer’s
manual. The tachograph manual applies to the tachograph in the
vehicle upon delivery. The manual can be ordered from Scania
as a spare part.
If the tachograph has been renewed, refer to the manual supplied
by the manufacturer.
Wireless download for the tachograph

The vehicle can be connected to Scania’s service for the remote
download of tachograph data. The service transfers data
wirelessly from the tachograph and driver card.
Tachograph and driver card data is transferred automatically.
Driver card data can also be transferred by pressing the switch
for downloading data from the driver card.
Downloading takes approx. 10 minutes and can be done while
the vehicle is stationary or moving. Remote download of driver
card data is only possible if the driver card is inserted in
compartment 1. Contact the vehicle owner for more information
about the download service.
Complete
20170627 86
b365938
Switch for downloading data from the driver card.
Manually downloading driver card data

The power must be switched on when the download is started.
The download of driver card data will be completed even if the
power is cut off with the starter key during the download.
Proceed as follows to manually download data from the driver

card:
1. Insert the driver card into tachograph card slot 1 and let
it remain there while downloading.
2. Press the download switch.
3. The LED in the switch will be lit during the download.
4. The LED in the switch goes out when the download is

complete.
Note:
If the power is cut off with the battery mastery
switch, the download of driver card data is
cancelled.
87 Complete
20170627
Failed download
If the LED in the switch starts to flash, then an error has
occurred and the download has failed. Press the switch once as
acknowledgement so the LED stops flashing.
A download can fail for a number of different reasons:
Switch Possible cause Solution
Flashes No driver card Insert a driver card

immediately in compartment 1
Lights up at first Problem with the Try again.

and then starts to company card Download failed
flash after a few again; contact the
minutes vehicle owner.
Lit for over 30 No mobile Move the vehicle

minutes coverage
ID button
The vehicle may be equipped with an ID button to allow the
vehicle’s driver to be identified.
Complete
20170627 88
3
1. LED-lamp
2. Reader
b362492
3. ID button
Hold the ID button against the reader to identify the vehicle’s

driver. The ID button is magnetic and must be left on the reader
throughout the work shift.
The reader is equipped with an LED-lamp which signals the ID
status.
The following statuses are possible:
• Driver unknown: The LED-lamp does not come on.
• Being registered: The LED-lamp flashes 5 times at 0.5 s

intervals.
• The driver is registered: The LED-lamp is constantly on.
The vehicle can be driven/operated regardless of the status.

If the vehicle is equipped with both a tachograph and ID button,
the tachograph has priority.
89 Complete
20170627
IVD
The instrument cluster displays information about the vehicle’s
systems and you can read fault codes. The vehicle’s internal time
data, which is set at the factory, is used in the IVD. The clock in
the tachograph will control the clock in the instrument cluster
and thereby also the time indication in IVD.
Navigate into the menu Settings – Information – Diagnos/IVD.

Under Diagnos/IVD are two submenus:
ECU system
Here you select the system that you would like to investigate.
Then there are 2 options:
• Information.
1. The part number of the control unit

ACS Information
1 in question.
Part: 2222222 2. The part number of hardware in
2 Hardware: 3333333 the control unit in question.
Software: 4444444 3. The part number of the software in
3
b364709
the control unit in question.
• Fault codes
Complete
20170627 90
1. Fault code
Fault codes
1
2. Number
Fault code: 222222222
2
Number: 33333 3. If the fault code is active
3 Active Yes
4. The first and latest time the fault
Last detected:
4 2016-09-01 22:22 PM code occurred or only the latest
time the fault code occurred,
depending on the vehicle’s
b364710
specification
Self-test display
Here you can select a test that checks that indicator lamps and
other information is displayed correctly in the instrument
cluster.
• Gauges
• Indicator lamps
• Sound
• Centre display
• Side displays
Electronic control systems

The list in the instrument cluster displays the electronic control
systems in the vehicle that can create fault codes and that are
supported by IVD. Which electronic control systems the list
contains depends on the vehicle’s specification.
91 Complete
20170627
Tyre pressure monitoring

IMPORTANT!
Tyre pressure monitoring does not replace daily
checks. Manual checking of the tyres should be
carried out daily even on vehicles equipped with
tyre pressure monitoring.
IMPORTANT!
Warnings are displayed based the reference value
that has been set. You can change the reference
value for each axle and adjust the values to the
vehicle usage.
IMPORTANT!
The pressure sensors are fitted on the rims and
the control unit which is fitted on the frame must
not be coated with paint. This can disrupt the
wireless communications.
Tyre pressure monitoring monitors the air pressure in each tyre

and displays the information in the instrument cluster. Tyre
pressure monitoring only monitors the tyre pressure and cannot
affect the actual air pressure in the tyres.
Complete
20170627 92
b374112
Warning of incorrect tyre pressure.
The following warnings may be shown in the instrument

cluster:
• White warning is displayed when the air pressure is

insufficient in the tyre. Insufficient air pressure in the
tyres will affect tyre wear and fuel economy.
• Yellow warning is displayed for low tyre pressure. To

reduce the risk of a tyre blow-out you should increase
the tyre air pressure.
• Yellow warning is displayed when the tyre air pressure is

significantly higher than the reference value. High tyre
pressure affects road-holding ability which increases
tyre wear and the sensitivity to uneven road surfaces.
• A yellow warning is also displayed if air is leaking from

the tyres for a long period of time.
The applicable tyres light up in yellow in the instrument cluster

for too high or too low tyre pressures.
Tyres that are leaking air are marked with an exclamation mark
(!) by the tyres:
93 Complete
20170627
8.0 8.0 !5.0
8.0 8.0
8.0 !7.2
Tyres with air leaks are marked
8.0 5.0 8.0
b380394
with an exclamation mark (!).
IMPORTANT!
The pressure sensors are fitted on the rims and
the control unit which is fitted on the frame must
not be coated with paint. Paint can interfere with
the wireless communication.
Show tyre pressure

Use the OK button to navigate the display menu.
1. Select Vehicle information.
2. Scroll to tyre pressure with the down arrow.
Complete
20170627 94
8.1 8.1 8.1 8.1 8.1
8.1 8.1
8.1 8.1
Pressure is shown for all tyres on
8.1 8.1 8.1 8.1 8.1
b381905
the vehicle.
b380393
A dash is displayed:
• when the signal has previously been received from the

tyre’s pressure sensor but the contact was interrupted.
• when no signal has been received from the tyre pressure

sensor since the power was last switched on with the
battery master switch.
When the vehicle is stationary, it is possible that the signals from

some tyres are not reaching the control unit. Communication
works best when the vehicle is moving and the wheels are
rotating. If the battery master switch has been switched off, or if
the power was disconnected for some other reason, it may take
up to 20 minutes before all air pressures are displayed again.
95 Complete
20170627
View trailer tyre pressures

If the trailer is equipped with TPM, you can view the trailer tyre
pressures. View the tyre pressures of the tractor in the same way.
8.1 8.1
1 8.1 8.1
8.1 8.1
8.1 8.1
b380391
Displaying trailer tyre pressures
Setting reference pressure

Enter the reference pressure for the pairs of wheels on each axle.
The setting can only be changed when the vehicle is stationary.
Refer to the section on tyre pressures for information about the
recommended air pressures.
Use the OK button to navigate in the menu.
1. Select Settings and then Vehicle.
2. Select TPM reference pressure and press the OK

button.
3. Reference pressure can now be set. Press the up arrow to

increase or the down arrow to decrease the value.
− Setting starts with the front axle.
Complete
20170627 96
− Press the right-hand or left-hand arrow to select

the next axle.
4. Press the OK button to save the changes. Press the Back

button to end without saving.
After changing reference pressure, it may take 5-10 seconds

before the new value appears.
Driving time and rest time support

Driving time and rest time support exists to make it easier for the
driver to keep track of breaks and rest during a driving trip.
Driving time and rest time support is simple to use and displays
time data in the instrument cluster display during driving.
Note:
The system is a support function and should only
be seen as giving advice. Always adhere to
applicable legislation regarding driving and rest
times in the country you are currently in.
The following views may be shown in the instrument cluster:
• Overviews
• Accumulated time and upcoming activity whilst driving.
• Accumulated time and upcoming activity whilst resting.
The following symbols are shown in the views depending on

what type of rest or driving trip is in progress or coming up.
97 Complete
20170627
1. Break
1 2 3 4
2. Daily rest
3. Weekly rest
5 6 7 4. Driving trip
5. Day trip
6. Week trip
7. No remaining driving time for the
b387487
current week or 2-week period.
Driver activity
The view shows the current and next driver activity. The current
activity is always shown at the top.
1 01:43 02:47
2 1. Current driver activity

07:34 09:00
b364706
2. Coming driver activity
Driving times
This view displays the accumulated driving trip time and how
much time is left until the next activity. The left-hand value
shows the accumulated time and the right-hand value remaining
time.
Complete
20170627 98
1 2
00:17 04:13 1. Current driving time.
2. Remaining driving time.
3
00:17 08:43 3. Times over a day.
4. Times over a week.
4 5
16:24 39:36 5. Indication of extended driving
b364705
time.
If the driver drives for a longer period than usual within a day, an
extended driving time indication is used. There are two
opportunities for extended driving time within a week.
Rest times
This view displays the accumulated break and rest time and how
much time is left until the next activity.
The left-hand value shows the accumulated time and the right-
hand value remaining time. Rest time marked in grey means that
the opportunity to use that rest time is deactivated. The driver
must choose a longer break or rest.
99 Complete
20170627
1 2
00:12 00:33
1. Current rest time.
3 2. Remaining rest time.
00:12 08:48
3. Times over a day.
4 5
4. Times over a week.
00:12 44:48
b364704
5. Indication of reduced daily rest.
The minimum rest indication shows the earliest time that the
driver can continue with next driving trip. If the driver starts
driving trip before the total rest time is over, a reduced daily rest
indication will be used. There are three opportunities for
reduced daily rest within a week.
A break of 45 minutes can be divided into two breaks. One break
of 15 minutes and one later break of 30 minutes. A divided break
will always give a second break of at least 30 minutes. Regardless
of whether the first break was longer than 15 minutes.
Warnings
An orange warning symbol is displayed when the driver has
exceeded the break or rest time.
Complete
20170627 100
1
04:35 00:00
06:54 03:06
16:24 39:36
b364708
1. Exceeded time warning.
Hour counter
b371928
The vehicle is equipped with an hour counter which makes it

possible to monitor the operating time. The hour counter is
located inside the driver’s door on the side of the instrument
panel.
101 Complete
20170627
Driver environment
Driver environment
Steering wheel
2 3
1 4
5
6
7
10 9 8
b362861
The illustration above displays all switches available in the

steering wheel.
The switches have the following functions:

1. Radio: Change track, station, volume.
Complete
20170627 102
Driver environment
2. Radio: Selection of audio source.
3. Radio: Lower the volume.
4. Instrument cluster: Menu navigation
5. Instrument cluster: OK button
6. Instrument cluster: Back button
7. Instrument cluster: Quick selection
8. Downhill speed control
9. Adaptive cruise control
10. Cruise control
For more information on a switch, see the section for each

function.
Press the middle of the steering wheel to activate the horn.
Adjustable steering wheel

The steering wheel is adjustable for height and rake so that a
comfortable driving posture can be obtained.
103 Complete
20170627
Driver environment
! WARNING!
Adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is

stationary and check that the settings are locked
before you drive off.
1
2
1. Open position
b363208
2. Locked position
Proceed as follows to adjust the height and rake:

1. Push the steering wheel adjustment button into the
open position. You will then have a few seconds to adjust
the steering wheel position.
2. Push the button into the locked position to lock the

setting. The settings also lock automatically after a few
seconds.
Parking position
On vehicles with an adjustable steering column the steering

wheel can be angled until it is parallel with the cab floor.
Complete
20170627 104
Driver environment
! WARNING!
The steering wheel may only be turned to the

parking position when the vehicle is parked.
Direction indicator and wiper lever
1
2 3 4 5
b358901
Controls on direction indicator and wiper lever:

1. Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers for
windscreen and headlamps: press the end of the lever.
2. Direction indicator: move lever up or down. With a

light press upwards or downwards the direction
indicator will flash 5 times and then switch off.
105 Complete
20170627
Driver environment
3. Switching between main and dipped beam: pull lever

towards you.
4. Windscreen wiper: turn the ring to start the windscreen

wiper and select the speed.
5. Windscreen wiper: turn the ring to select the

intermittent wiper speed.
Windscreen wipers
A light press on the end of the lever gives one sweep of the
windscreen wipers and a heavier press starts the washing of the
windscreen and headlamps. The windscreen wiper function is
adjusted with the left-hand ring and the windscreen wiper speed
is adjusted with the right-hand ring.
Select the windscreen wiper function:
• Dashed line: intervals
• Single line: slow speed
• Double lines: high speed.
Adjusting the windscreen wiper speed:
• Turn the ring to the desired speed. Upwards gives a

higher speed.
Complete
20170627 106
Driver environment
1
2 3 4 5
b358901
Controls on direction indicator and wiper lever:
1. Windscreen wipers and washers for windscreen and
headlamps: press the end of the lever.
2. Direction indicator: move lever up or down.
3. Switching between main and dipped beam: pull lever

towards you.
4. Windscreen wipers or rain sensor: turn the ring to select

function.
5. Windscreen wipers or rain sensor: turn the ring to select

the interval wiper speed or rain sensor sensitivity.
107 Complete
20170627
Driver environment
Windscreen wipers
A light press on the end of the lever gives one sweep of the
windscreen wipers and a heavier press starts the washing of the
windscreen and headlamps. The windscreen wiper function is
adjusted with the left-hand ring and the windscreen wiper speed
is adjusted with the right-hand ring.
Select the windscreen wiper function:
• Dashed line: rain sensor or intervals
• Single line: slow speed
• Double lines: high speed.
Adjusting the windscreen wiper speed:
• Turn the ring to the desired speed. Upwards gives a

higher speed.
Rain sensor
Some of the positions of the direction indicator and wiper lever
can be used for the rain sensor. Activation and deactivation of the
rain sensor is done in the instrument cluster.
Proceed as follows:
• Start the rain sensor by turning the left-hand ring to the

dashed line.
• Change rain sensor sensitivity by turning the right-hand

ring to the desired position.
Complete
20170627 108
Driver environment
Set rain sensor or wiping interval

Activation or deactivation of the rain sensor is done in the
instrument cluster. When deactivating the rain sensor, the
interval wiper function is activated. Use the OK button to
navigate the display menu. You can find the selections under
Settings. For more information, refer to the Menus in Display
section.
Adjusting the collapsible gear lever in

the cab
The collapsible gear lever position can be adjusted for optimum
adaptation to the driver.
1 2
1. M6 lock nut
b206721
2. Pivot screw
To adjust the gear lever:

1. Undo the gear lever boot and lift it upwards.
2. Undo the M6 lock nut.
109 Complete
20170627
Driver environment
3. Turn the pivot screw 0-180° to adjust the gear lever

knob. Beyond 180° the knob will move back to its
original position.
4. Tighten the M6 lock nut at the correctly adjusted

position.
5. Press on the gear lever boot.
Ergonomics
Frequently adjusting the sitting position and using the seat
settings is essential to prevent stress injuries to the back and neck.
Here are 10 tips on how to use the seat settings. Change the
settings frequently and adjust the seat to the best position for the
traffic situation.
Keep both feet on the floor while adjusting the seat.
1
10
6
8
4 7
2
b362862
Complete
20170627 110
Driver environment
1. Sit as close to the backrest as possible.
2. Set the damping in the seat so that it is suitable for your

weight.
3. Set the position of the seat horizontally and vertically so

that you have good visibility and can operate both the
steering wheel and the pedals comfortably. Check the
lengthwise position of the seat cushion. You should be
able to get two or three fingers between the seat squab
and the back of the knees.
4. Adjust the inclination of the seat squab so that the

pressure under the thighs is even. The angle between
the seat squab and backrest should be greater than 90
degrees.
5. Push the backrest back slightly so you can grip the

steering wheel comfortably with slightly bent arms and
your back against the backrest.
6. Set the steering wheel so that you can work with your
arms close to the body and with your shoulders relaxed.
On long journeys, consider positioning your hands
lower down on the steering wheel so that it is easier to
relax the shoulders.
7. It is essential the lumbar support is adjusted correctly.

Adjust the lumbar support so that your seating position
is not cramped.
111 Complete
20170627
Driver environment
8. Adjust the side supports close to the upper body to

guarantee a good and stable support.
9. Set the head restraint so that you can easily lean

backwards and rest your neck.
10. The armrests should provide support for the arms and
elbows without limiting their free movement. They
should help to take the strain off the neck and shoulders.
Fixed seat
4
b209874
1 2 3
1. Adjusting the rake of the whole seat 3. Adjusting backrest rake

2. Adjusting height 4. Adjusting the longitudinal position
of the seat
Complete
20170627 112
Driver environment
The seat may also be fitted with the following:
• Seat heating
• Safety belt warning
Seat, basic
4
b209876
1 2 3
1. Adjusting height 3. Adjusting backrest rake

2. Quick lowering 4. Adjusting the longitudinal position
of the seat
• Seat heating
• Seat release control
113 Complete
20170627
Driver environment
Seat, middle
7 8
10
b209348
1 2 3 4 5 6
1. Seat heating 7. Lower lumbar support

2. Shock absorber 8. Upper lumbar support
3. Adjusting the rake of the whole seat 9. Adjusting the seat cushion
4. Adjusting height lengthwise
5. Quick lowering 10.Adjusting the longitudinal position

of the seat
6. Adjust the backrest rake
• Armrest
Complete
20170627 114
Driver environment
• Belt pretensioner
Seat, premium
2
13
12
b333975
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
1. Adjusting backrest rake 8. Seat heating

2. Adjusting the angle of the upper 9. Seat ventilation
backrest section 10.Adjusting the rake of the whole seat
3. Backrest side support 11.Rapid evacuation of height control
4. Upper lumbar support 12.Adjusting the longitudinal position
5. Lower lumbar support of the seat
6. Adjusting height 13.Adjusting the seat cushion
7. Shock absorber lengthwise
• Armrest
115 Complete
20170627
Driver environment
• Belt pretensioner
Folding seat
1. Backrest angle
2. Lengthwise adjustment of whole
b200517
1 2 seat
Corresponding controls can be found on the inside of the seat.

The seat backrest can be folded down to form a table. The head
restraint can be adjusted manually. The seat cushion can be
folded up.
The seat can also have these functions:
• Seat heating
• Armrest
Complete
20170627 116
Driver environment
Reclining seat
1. Lift the seat up against the

1 backrest until it stops to be able to
rotate and change the seat’s
position longitudinally.
2. Adjust the backrest rake
2
3. Adjust the longitudinal position of
the seat
3
b380390
4 4. Adjust the seat squab angle
Seat heating
The seat heating has three positions: No heating, 25% heating
or 100% heating.
Note:
Make sure the seat heating in the passenger seat
is not turned on if the seat is not occupied. This
may shorten the service life of the seat heating.
117 Complete
20170627
Driver environment
Extendable ladder
Ladder to the upper bed

An extendable ladder is available for the upper bed. This is
located on the underside of the upper bed. You can unfold the
ladder with a couple of simple manoeuvres.
The ladder is made to take a load of up to 140 kg.
During the trip, the ladder must be stored and fastened in place.
Extend the ladder as follows:

1. Release the ladder by pushing on the button in the
casing.
2. Move the ladder downwards and towards you.
3. Pull out the ladder to its full length.
Fixed bed
b360575
You can fold up the entire bed to access the storage areas under
the bed, for example.
Complete
20170627 118
Driver environment
Proceed as follows to fold the bed up or down:
• Fold up: pull the handle outwards and move the bed up at
the same time.
• Fold down: push down the bed until the bed is in a locked
position.
Cleaning and maintenance
Note:
Follow the washing instructions on the cover.
The mattress cover can be removed and cleaned.
Proceed as follows to remove the mattress cover:

1. Lift the mattress off the bed.
2. Remove the mattress cover using the zipper.
Upper bed
The upper bed can be folded down when the vehicle is
stationary. The bed is attached to the back of the cab and is
attached using belts in the ceiling.
119 Complete
20170627
Driver environment
Lowering and raising the upper bed
Hold the button in to fold down

b357519
the bed.
Proceed as follows to fold down the bed:

1. Press the button on the underside of the long side of the
bed.
2. Continue to hold the button in while the bed is folding.

Release the button when the bed is completely lowered.
Proceed as follows to fold up the bed:
• Push the bed upwards until it is completely folded up.

Locking takes place automatically.
Note:
Follow the washing instructions on the cover.
The mattress cover can be removed and cleaned.
Complete
20170627 120
Driver environment
Proceed as follows to remove the mattress cover:

1. Fold the bed up against the wall.
2. Detach the two eyes on the long side of the bed closest
to the cab rear wall.
3. Remove the mattress cover using the zipper.
Kitchen module
Microwave oven
For information about the microwave oven, refer to the
manufacturer’s manual.
Coffee maker
For information about the coffee maker, refer to the
manufacturer’s manual.
Refrigerator
The refrigerator temperature can be at most 40°C below the
ambient temperature.
Press the power button in the control panel to start or switch off
the refrigerator.
If the refrigerator is not to be used for a longer period of time,
the lid should be slightly open so that the air can circulate.
121 Complete
20170627
Driver environment
Control panel
1 2 3
1. Power button
2. Temperature mode button
b356885
3. Display
Note:
The refrigerator has an energy saving function
which means that it is switched off automatically
if the vehicle is shut down and the refrigerator
has consumed 20 Ah.
If the refrigerator has switched off automatically
due to the energy saving function, it must be
restarted manually by pressing the power button
in the control panel.
If the refrigerator is running when the vehicle is switched off, the

refrigerator’s energy saving function is activated. The display on
the refrigerator control panel shows the number of hours
estimated to remain until shutdown. When restarting with the
energy saving function, it may take a few minutes for the
refrigerator to calculate how many hours are left. 99 is shown in
the display until the calculation is done.
The refrigerator has 3 temperature modes. The temperature for
the different temperature modes is set automatically.
Complete
20170627 122
Driver environment
Fridge
Select the Fridge mode (Fridge) by pressing the temperature

mode button a number of times. When the Fridge mode is
selected, 2 snow flakes are shown in the display.
The temperature of the Fridge mode is approx. 2°C to 7°C.
Freezer
Press the temperature mode button and select the Freezer mode
(Freezer). When the Freezer mode is selected, 3 snow flakes are
shown in the display.
The temperature of the Freezer mode is approx. -13°C to -17°C.
Chill
Press the temperature mode button and select the Chill mode
(Chill). When the Chill mode is selected, 1 snow flake is shown
in the display.
The temperature of the Chill mode is approx. 7°C to 12°C
Clean the refrigerator regularly. Switch off the refrigerator and

wipe it internally and externally with a mild soap solution. Wipe
the refrigerator dry after cleaning. Rub the seals on the door with
talcum powder once a year.
123 Complete
20170627
Driver environment
Fault messages
If a refrigerator fault occurs, the following fault messages may be

shown in the refrigerator display or signalled in the case of an
audio signal:
Message Lamp in Acoustic Event

in the the signal
display display
- Flashes - Temperature above

red the limit value
- Lights up 2 short 1 hour until shutdown

green signals due to low voltage in
the vehicle battery
- Lights up 3 short 30 minutes until

green signals shutdown due to low
voltage in the vehicle
battery
EL Flashes 4 short Shutdown due to low

red signals voltage in the vehicle
battery
CP Flashes - Shutdown due to cab

red tilting
E1 Flashes 1 long Communication error

red signal in the display
Complete
20170627 124
Driver environment
Message Lamp in Acoustic Event

in the the signal
display display
E2 Flashes 1 long Fan fault

red signal
E3 Flashes 1 long Compressor blocked

red signal
E4 Flashes 1 long Compressor speed

red signal fault
E5 Flashes 1 long Overheated ECU

red signal
E6 Flashes 1 long Temperature sensor

red signal fault
TV preparation
Your vehicle is prepared with a wall bracket for a TV. On the
wall bracket, attach a TV bracket that the TV can be attached
to.
125 Complete
20170627
Driver environment
2 1. Wall bracket
2. AUX-input
3
b384245
3. 12 volt electrical socket
IMPORTANT!
The maximum load on the wall bracket is 10 kg.
The screw holes’ locations in the wall bracket have the

dimensions 75 × 75 mm.
The limitations that apply for the TV are as follows:
• Maximum external dimensions for the TV are 415 × 655

mm.
• The thickness from the back of the TV bracket to the

front of the TV is maximum 60 mm. This also includes
any electrical cables that should be parallel to the back of
the TV. If the thickness is more than 60 mm, the bed
cannot be lowered.
• The TV must be able to be connected to a 12 volt

electrical socket.
Complete
20170627 126
Driver environment
Scania recommends TV sets intended for e.g. trucks or caravans

as they often have a built-in antenna amplifier.
Fitting the TV bracket

Remove the 4 screws from the wall bracket. Screw the TV
bracket in place.
When the TV is fitted, the upper bed should be raised to
facilitate the installation. After the installation, check that the
bed can be lowered.
Electrical socket in cab

There are 12, 24 and 230 volt sockets located inside the cab. 12
and 24 volt sockets can be loaded with 360 watts. The 230 volt
socket can be loaded with 350 watts.
The vehicle is equipped with two USB ports. One is located in

the instrument panel and one is located in the cab rear wall. The
USB port located on the rear wall of the cab is adapted for
charging and charges USB units up to 2.4 A.
Climate system
The automatic climate system checks and controls the climate in
the cab. The climatic comfort can be regulated with e.g. air
conditioning, short-stop cooler, fan, air distribution, heater,
auxiliary heater, short-stop heater and recirculation depending
on what your vehicle is equipped with.
127 Complete
20170627
Driver environment
Scania recommends that the climate system is set to automatic

mode. Personal settings can then be made for temperature and
air distribution.
Note:
Depending on the battery’s state of charge, the
times for the climate system’s rest functions may
be shortened.
The vehicle has no function that prevents any
discharge of the batteries when using e.g. rest
cooler, auxiliary heater or other equipment that
affects the climate.
The following settings can appear in the panel depending on the

vehicle’s specification.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
b360120
1. Recirculation 6. Fan
2. Air conditioning 7. Auxiliary heater or short-stop
3. Temperature heater
4. Air distribution 8. Auxiliary cab cooler or short-stop

ventilation
5. Max defroster
Complete
20170627 128
Driver environment
Recirculation
• Press the button once to start automatic recirculation
mode. The LED in A lights. This means that
recirculation is switched on automatically when the air
quality outside the cab is too poor.
• Press the button a second time to start forced

recirculation. The LED in ON lights.
• Press the switch a third time to switch off the

recirculation.
Air conditioning
• Press the button once to start automatic air conditioning
mode. The LED in A lights. This means that the air
conditioning optimises the temperature to achieve the
lowest possible fuel consumption. The air conditioning
is also used to dry the air and prevent fogging on the
windscreen.
• Press the button a second time to start the air

conditioning maximum mode. The LED in ON lights.
The max. position is used e.g. for the need to dry a
higher atmospheric humidity. Note that the maximum
position will increase the fuel consumption. Therefore,
do not use the maximum position unnecessarily.
• Press the button a third time to switch off the air

conditioning.
129 Complete
20170627
Driver environment
Temperature
• Turn the temperature rotary control until the desired cab
temperature is shown in the display.
• Press the button on the rotary control to start the climate

system’s automatic mode. Automatic mode means that
also the fan, air distribution, air conditioning and
recirculation are automatic.
Air distribution
Adjust the air distribution by pressing the air distribution
buttons as required. The buttons for the selected air distributors
light green.
Max defroster
Press the button once to start the function for removing frost or
mist from the windscreen.
Fan
Turn the fan rotary control until the desired fan speed is shown
in the display.
The following settings can appear in the panel depending on the
vehicle’s specification.
Complete
20170627 130
Driver environment
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
b361439
1. Recirculation 5. Max defroster
2. Air conditioning 6. Fan
3. Temperature 7. Auxiliary heater
4. Air distribution 8. Auxiliary cab cooler or short-stop
ventilation
Air conditioning
• Press the button once to start automatic air conditioning
mode. The LED in A lights. This means that the air
conditioning optimises temperature in the cab to
achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption.
• Press the button a second time to start the air

conditioning maximum mode. The LED in ON lights.
The max. position is used e.g. for the need to dry a
higher atmospheric humidity. Note that the maximum
position will increase the fuel consumption. Therefore,
do not use the maximum position unnecessarily.
• Press the button a third time to switch off the air

conditioning.
131 Complete
20170627
Driver environment
Recirculation
Press the button once to start recirculation. The diode in the
switch is lit when the recirculation is active.
Temperature
• Turn the temperature rotary control until the desired
temperature is shown in the display.
• Press the button on the rotary control to start the climate

system’s automatic mode. Automatic mode means that
also the fan, air distribution and air conditioning are
automatic.
Air distribution
buttons as required. The buttons for the selected air distributors
light green.
Max defroster
Press the button once to start the function for removing frost or
mist from the windscreen.
Fan
Turn the fan rotary control until the desired fan speed is shown
in the display.
Complete
20170627 132
Driver environment
Temperature
Turn the temperature rotary control to the required
temperature.
Auxiliary heater
For more information about the auxiliary heater functions, see
the Auxiliary heater section.
Air conditioning
Press the button once to start the air conditioning. The LED in
the switch is lit when air conditioning is active.
Recirculation
Press the button once to start recirculation. The diode in the
switch is lit when recirculation is active.
Air distribution
buttons. The buttons for the selected air distributors light green.
Fan
Turn the fan rotary control to the required fan speed.
133 Complete
20170627
Driver environment
Auxiliary cab cooler

The auxiliary cab cooler is used to keep the temperature in the
cab cool while parked.
• Press the auxiliary cab cooler button once to start the Eco
function. The function means the auxiliary cab cooler is
run at low level and is switched off automatically after 8
hours.
• Press the button a second time to start the Pwr function.

The function means the auxiliary cab cooler is run at a
higher level and is switched off automatically after 2
hours.
Short-stop ventilation
Short-stop ventilation is used to air the cab for short stops or
when sleeping in the cab.
• Press the short-stop ventilation button once to start the
Lo function. The function means the fan is run at low
level and is switched off automatically after 8 hours. The
function is suitable when e.g. sleeping in the cab.
• Press the button a second time to start the Hi function.

The function means the fan is run at a high level and is
switched off automatically after 2 hours. The function is
suitable for use at, for example, short breaks.
Complete
20170627 134
Driver environment
Mist or frost
• Activate the defroster to guide the air to the windscreen.
• Increase the temperature to heat the air in the cab.
• If required, activate the air conditioning to dry the air.
• Activate recirculation in damp weather.
• Select a high fan speed.
Extra temperature settings

Set the desired temperature using the temperature rotary
control. In addition, you can select the Low , High or High
Quick settings for maximum cooling, maximum heating or extra
quick heating.
Maximum cooling
Turn the temperature rotary control 1 notch past the minimum
position to select Low. The cab is then cooled using the fan, air
distribution and recirculation.
Maximum heating
Turn the temperature rotary control 1 notch past the highest
selectable temperature to select High. The cab is then heated by
guiding out maximum heat and optimum fan, air distribution and
recirculation.
135 Complete
20170627
Driver environment
Extra quick heating

Turn the temperature rotary control 2 notches past the highest
selectable temperature to select High Quick. The cab is then
heated by guiding out maximum heat and optimum fan, air
distribution and recirculation. The automatic climate system
also activates, if necessary, the exhaust brake, retarder and
auxiliary heater to heat the coolant, if the vehicle is equipped
with these functions.
Mist or frost
Press the button for maximum defroster to dry and heat the air.
Note that the maximum position will increase the fuel
consumption. Therefore, do not use the maximum position
unnecessarily.
Temperature setting in case of a fault

If there is a fault in the climate system, a number between 0 and
100 will be displayed. 0 means 0% heat and 100 means 100%
heat. You have to regulate the heating from 0%-100% in 5%
increments yourself, as the climate system cannot regulate the
temperature automatically.
Error is also displayed if there is a fault. Contact a Scania
workshop for repair if the fault occurs.
Complete
20170627 136
Driver environment
Air horn b361449
Switch for air horn.
The air horn sounds together with the ordinary horn when the
switch is activated.
Sound level control for reverse alarm

b361444
Switch for reverse alarm sound level adjustment.
Press the bottom of the switch to reduce the sound volume of the
reversing alarm, the indication on the switch then comes on.
Reset the sound level by pressing the top of the switch. The
sound level is also automatically reset when you switch off the
ignition.
Press the bottom of the switch to switch off the sound for the
reverse alarm, the indication on the switch then comes on. Reset
the sound level by pressing the top of the switch.
137 Complete
20170627
Driver environment
Rear view mirrors and window

winders
The switches are located on the inside of the doors.
Adjusting the rear view mirrors
Wide angle and main mirror
1. Joystick for controlling the

2 3 selected rear view mirror
1 2. Left-hand wide-angle mirror
3. Right-hand wide-angle mirror
4 5
4. Left-hand main mirror
b364508
5. Right-hand main mirror
Press the switch for the mirror you want to adjust. The switch for
the selected mirror lights green. Use the joystick to adjust the
mirror.
Adjusting groups of rear view mirrors
Press the switches for the top rear view mirrors (2) and (3) or
bottom (4) and (5) at the same time to adjust them
simultaneously. The mirrors are adjusted according to centre of
the vehicle starting with the mirror on the driver’s side.
Press the switches for the left-hand rear view mirrors (2) and (4)
or right-hand (3) and (5) at the same time to adjust them
simultaneously. The mirrors are adjusted by turning in the same
direction.
Complete
20170627 138
Driver environment
Front view mirror

b364507
Front view mirror
Use the joystick to adjust the selected mirror. The selected

switch lights up green.
Close-proximity mirror
b364506
Close-proximity mirror
Use the joystick to adjust the selected mirror. The selected

switch lights up green.
Adjusting the front view mirror and close-proximity mirror at

the same time
Press the switches for the front view mirror and close-proximity
mirror simultaneously to adjust them at the same time. The
mirrors are adjusted around a point on the ground.
Window winders
b364505
Switch for window winders.
Lift or press the switch to control the window winders.
139 Complete
20170627
Driver environment
Window winders b364505
Switch for window winders.
Lift or press the switch to control the window winders. Use the
one-touch function by lifting or pressing down the switch 2 steps
to activate the automation in the window winders.
Note:
The window winder has a safety function that
makes it rewind if e.g. something is blocking the
window when winding up. After 2 failed
attempts, the quick-press function is switched off,
but is activated again when the window has been
closed completely. The safety function can also
release if the vehicle is subjected to bumps, e.g.
holes in the road, while winding the window up.
Rear view mirror heating

b364511
Switch for rear view mirror heating
Press the switch to activate heating of the rear view mirror. The
switch lights up yellow. The switch is located in the door on the
driver’s side.
Complete
20170627 140
Driver environment
b364509
Switch for rear view mirror heating
Press the switch to activate heating of the rear view mirror. The
switch lights up yellow. The switch is located in the door on the
driver’s side.
From the vehicle’s instrument cluster, it is possible to set if the

heating of the rear view mirror is to be time-based or activated
continuously. The settings are carried out under the settings
menu in the instrument cluster.
Heated windscreen
The vehicle is equipped with heated windscreen.
b361121
Switch for heated windscreen.
141 Complete
20170627
Driver environment
Note:
To reduce the load on the vehicle’s batteries, the
function should be deactivated when not being
actively used.
Avoid using heated windscreen together with
other functions that consume a lot of power, for
example the cab heater.
The function can only be activated when the
engine is running.
Roof hatch
b383834
Switch for opening and closing the roof hatch.
Opening the roof hatch:
• Press once quickly on the lower part of the switch to open

the hatch fully.
• Hold in the button to open the hatch gradually until the

button is released.
Closing the roof hatch:
• Press once quickly on the upper part of the switch.
Complete
20170627 142
Driver environment
• Hold in the button to close the hatch gradually until the

button is released.
Roof hatch
b363508
Opening the roof hatch:

1. Pull the handle with a rotating movement downwards,
round and back.
Auxiliary heater
The auxiliary heater heats the cab. It is powered by the vehicle’s
fuel and heats the coolant in the vehicle coolant system. Control
of the auxiliary heater varies depending on the vehicle climate
system.
The auxiliary heater can heat the cab, the engine or the cab and
engine. It is powered by the vehicle’s fuel and heats the coolant
in the vehicle coolant system. Control of the auxiliary heater
varies depending on the vehicle climate system.
143 Complete
20170627
Driver environment
The vehicle is equipped with an auxiliary heater that uses excess

heat in the engine coolant. The heat is routed to the cab through
the heating system.
Engine pre-heating makes cold starts easier and extends the life
of the engine. The heat is routed to the cab through the heating
system. Note the warnings and advice on care and usage.
IMPORTANT!
The auxiliary heater may stop working if it is not
used for long periods of time. To prevent this
from happening, run the auxiliary heater for
about 15 minutes once a month.
! WARNING!
To avoid accidents which can result in injury, it is

important to follow the instructions below when
using and maintaining the auxiliary heater.
• The auxiliary heater must not be turned on while the

vehicle is in a garage.
• When refuelling, the auxiliary heater must have been

switched off for at least 3 minutes before driving the
vehicle into the refuelling area.
Complete
20170627 144
Driver environment
• Do not use the auxiliary heater where highly flammable

fumes or gases may build up.
• The windows and roof hatch must be closed when the

auxiliary heater is active.
IMPORTANT!
To prevent the auxiliary heater from being
damaged or its service life reduced, it is important
to follow the points below when using and
maintaining the auxiliary heater.
• The auxiliary heater may only be started if it is filled with

coolant.
• To protect the auxiliary heater against corrosion, the

refrigerant must contain at least 10% antifreeze all year
round. In areas where there is no risk of frost damage,
only corrosion inhibitor needs to be added.
145 Complete
20170627
Driver environment
Note:
It is best if you switch off the auxiliary heater by
using the button on the climate system’s control
panel or by the remote control.
discharge of the batteries when using e.g.
auxiliary heater or other equipment that affects
the lighting or climate.
If the auxiliary heater is run on biodiesel, the auxiliary heater

service life is shortened. The starting ability can be affected at
low temperatures. For more information on operation at low
temperatures, see the section Fuel, biodiesel.
Starting the auxiliary heater

Start the auxiliary heater by pressing the auxiliary heater button.
The button is located in the climate panel.
Before starting the auxiliary heater, check that the outlets for
exhausts and combustion air are not blocked.
b357933
Button for activating the auxiliary heater.
Complete
20170627 146
Driver environment

The button is located in the climate panel. Press the button
several times to change the auxiliary heater functionality.
b358275
Number of Functionality
button presses
1 The auxiliary heater heats the cab.
2 The auxiliary heater heats the cab and

engine.
3 The auxiliary heater heats the engine.
4 The auxiliary heater is switched off.

The button is located in the climate panel. Press the button
several times to change the auxiliary heater functionality.
147 Complete
20170627
Driver environment
b358276
Number of Functionality
button presses
1 The auxiliary heater heats the cab.
2 The auxiliary heater heats the cab and

engine.
3 The auxiliary heater heats the engine.
4 The auxiliary heater is switched off.
When the climate system is set to maximum heating, the

auxiliary heater may start automatically. It is always possible to
shut down the auxiliary heater manually.
Starting the auxiliary heater with a warm engine
Under certain conditions, the auxiliary heater will not respond

when you start it with the switch. This is because the coolant in
the cooling system is at a high temperature. The auxiliary heater
starts automatically when the temperature in the cooling system
drops.
Complete
20170627 148
Driver environment
Starting the auxiliary heater with a cold engine
When the cab and engine are cold, it can take a long time before
heat is felt in the cab. The auxiliary heater is set by the
manufacturer to run at full power for a maximum of 2 hours.
Then it goes down to a lower power mode. The auxiliary heater’s
different operating modes at full power and shorter periods at
lower power are normal. Do not restart the auxiliary heater.
Starting the auxiliary heater with a cold engine
When the cab and engine are cold, it can take a long time before
heat is felt in the cab.
Switch off the auxiliary heater

Press the button to switch off the auxiliary heater. After the
button is pressed, it takes approximately 3 minutes before the
auxiliary heater is switched off.
Preset start of the auxiliary heater

Via the vehicle instrument cluster, it is possible to set the
auxiliary heater to start. The settings are carried out under the
settings menu in the instrument cluster.
It is possible to program the start in two ways, using a start time
and stop time.
Start time means that the auxiliary heater starts at the specified
time.
149 Complete
20170627
Driver environment
Stop time means that the auxiliary heater stops at the specified
time. The auxiliary heater automatically starts in advance and
heats the vehicle to the specified temperature, and for the
specified time.
It is also possible to set duration, repetition and zone.
Emergency stop
! WARNING!
Only use the emergency stop in the event of

danger. There is a risk of overheating.
Proceed as follows to stop the auxiliary heater in emergency:

1. Switch off the vehicle battery master switch.
2. Pull out the fuse. The fuse is located in the central

electric unit and has the symbol shown in the following
illustration.
3. Disconnect the auxiliary heater from the battery
Fuse symbol for auxiliary heater. The fuse is in the

central electric unit, which is located in the instrument
b206483
panel in front of the passenger seat.
Complete
20170627 150
Driver environment
Remote control for auxiliary heater
Tue
2 4
3
1. Activating the auxiliary heater
OK +
2. Alarm
3. Auxiliary cab cooler
4. Snooze function
5
5. Step up or down and confirm your
b170278
selection
151 Complete
20170627
Driver environment
Tue
1
3
4 1. Activating auxiliary heaters
6 2. Alarm
2
3. Auxiliary cab cooler
4. Snooze function
5
OK +
7 5. Start/switch off the audio source
6. Selection of audio source
7. Volume
8
8. Step up and down and confirm
b170279
your selection
Note:
The remote control functions may be affected
when the battery master switch has been
switched off and the vehicle has not been started.
Complete
20170627 152
Driver environment
Activating the auxiliary heater
Button for activating the auxiliary
b170280
heater.
Symbol displayed in the instrument cluster when the

b374043
auxiliary heater is activated.
Press the button to start the auxiliary heater. Adjust the

temperature using plus and minus. When the auxiliary heater is
activated, a symbol is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Auxiliary cab cooler

b170282
Button for activating the cab cooler.
Symbol that is displayed in the instrument cluster

b170281
when the cab cooler is activated.
Press the button to start the cab cooler. The temperature can be
controlled using the plus and minus. When the function is
activated, a symbol is displayed in the instrument cluster. Press
the button again to switch off the auxiliary cab cooler.
153 Complete
20170627
Driver environment
Alarm clock b170283
Button for activating the alarm clock.
Proceed as follows to set the alarm clock:

1. Press the alarm clock button.
2. Step up or down to select the hour. Press OK.
3. Step up or down to select the minutes. Press OK.
4. Choose between buzzer, radio and buzzer + radio by

stepping up or down. Press OK.
Symbol displayed in the instrument cluster when the

b374044
alarm clock is activated.
When the alarm clock is activated, a symbol is displayed in the

instrument cluster.
The buzzer is automatically shut off after 3 minutes. You can also
switch off the buzzer manually.
Switch off the buzzer manually in one of the following ways:
• Press the alarm clock button.
• Press OK.
Complete
20170627 154
Driver environment
• Switch on the power.
The radio is automatically switched off after 30 minutes if you

have not pressed the radio button, the alarm clock button or OK.
If you turn the key to the drive position, the radio is not switched
off.
Snooze function
b170285
Button for activating the snooze function.
If you press this button when the alarm clock is in operation, the
buzzer will fall silent for 10 minutes.
The radio will also be silent for 10 minutes.
App for the remote control of auxiliary

heater
It is possible to control the auxiliary heater remotely by using an
app. The app is called Scania Fleet Management and is available
for installation on mobile phones and other mobile units.
With this app it is possible to:
• Start the auxiliary heater.
• Program the start time.
• Program the stop time.
155 Complete
20170627
Driver environment
Sometimes it can take a few minutes for the vehicle to wake up

and acknowledge the command. This is not a fault, it is due to the
status of the vehicle when the commend is sent.
For more information about the auxiliary heater functions, see
the Auxiliary heater section.
Electric heater
Electric cab heater

b359616
Electric cab heater electrical socket.
The vehicle is prepared for an electric cab heater. Connect an

electric cab heater in the cab to a 230 V socket in the cab.
Connect a connection cable between the electrical input for the
electric cab heater and a 230 V socket. The electrical input for
the electric heater is located on the frame behind the cab on the
driver’s side. Connect the electric cab heater approx. 2 hours
before starting, in order to heat up the cab.
Complete
20170627 156
Driver environment
Electrical engine heater

b359617
Electrical input for the electrical engine heater.
The vehicle is equipped with an electrical engine heater.

Connect a connection cable between the electrical input for the
electrical engine heater and a 230 V socket. The electrical input
for the electrical heater is located on the frame behind the cab on
the driver’s side. The operating time should be adapted based on
the outside temperature. The recommended minimum times
are:
Outdoor temperature Operating time
0-10°C 1h
-10°C 2h
-20°C 3h
157 Complete
20170627
Driver environment
Outer storage compartments
Storage compartment under cab
Note:
At high engine temperatures, the interior of the
storage compartment could become hot.
Accessories
Fixed accessories should be retrofitted in a Scania workshop.
If the vehicle is fitted with electrical sockets, you can connect

portable accessories to them. The sockets are marked as 12 V or
24 V and are normally fitted on the instrument panel. Alternative
locations are possible.
IMPORTANT!
The voltage in 24 volt sockets can vary. Therefore
make sure that the accessories connected to 24
volt sockets can withstand continuous voltages up
to 30 V. Otherwise there is a risk that the
accessories will be damaged.
Complete
20170627 158
Driver assistance system

Hand throttle
The hand throttle works in a similar way to the cruise control.
The difference is that the hand throttle controls the engine speed
instead of the road speed.
You can, for example, use the function to set the engine speed
when operating a crane.
Engaging
You can use the hand throttle function when the vehicle is
stationary and when driving at low speeds, max. 10 km/h.
1. Return to previously saved engine

1 speed.
3
2. Shut off the hand throttle function
temporarily.
2 3. Activate the hand throttle function

b358621
and adjust the engine speed.
Setting the engine speed

The hand throttle’s preset engine speed is the engine speed you
get when you press the reset button (1).
Proceed as follows to change the hand throttle’s preset engine

speed:
1. Set the required engine speed by pressing + or - on the
cruise control button (3) on the steering wheel.
159 Complete
20170627
− A quick press on + increases the engine speed by 20

rpm. A long press on + (at least 3 seconds) increases
the engine speed by 200 rpm.
− A quick press on - decreases the engine speed by 20

rpm. A long press on - (at least 3 seconds) decreases
the engine speed by 200 rpm.
2. Save the new preset engine speed for hand throttle by

pressing the reset button (1) for at least 3 seconds.
After the hand throttle speed has been set, you can also change
the engine speed while driving with a short press on + or -.
Changes made with these short presses are not stored when you
switch off the engine.
Disengagement
You can disengage the hand throttle function in one of the

following ways:
• Press 0 on the steering wheel button (2)
• Depress the brake pedal
• Depress the clutch pedal
• Switch off the function with the master switch in the

instrument cluster. The function is off when it is set to 0.
• The function is switched off automatically when the

speed is above 15 km/h.
Complete
20170627 160
Kick-down
Kickdown is used to change down a gear, e.g. when overtaking.
Kickdown can also be used to delay changing up, so that the
higher gear is engaged at a higher engine speed.
Keep the accelerator pedal in the kickdown position to avoid the

engine losing power when changing up whilst driving uphill.
Acceleration control
To reduce fuel consumption and improve drive comfort, the
vehicle is fitted with acceleration control. The improvements are
most noticeable at low rolling resistance, when the vehicle has
low load or during operation with many stops and starts.
The driver is only aware of the acceleration control when the
vehicle fails to deliver full torque at low rolling resistance.
At high rolling resistance, e.g. under heavy load, driving on an
uphill slope, the acceleration control does not affect the engine
torque.
The degree of acceleration control can be adjusted at a Scania
workshop.
Temporary disengagement
The acceleration control can be temporarily disengaged at
speeds of more than 30 km/h. To do this, depress the accelerator
pedal to the kick-down position. At high rolling resistance, the
acceleration control cannot be certain of affecting the engine
torque. In such cases, depressing the accelerator pedal to the
kick-down position makes no difference.
161 Complete
20170627
Cruise control
Note:
The road speed must be at least 15 km/h for
cruise control to be engaged.
The symbol lights up white in the instrument cluster

b206464
when the cruise control is active.
Proceed as follows to activate the function:

1. Press quick selection and navigate to the cruise control.
2. Select Cruise control.
3. Press the toggle switch.
1. Return to the previously set speed.

1
3 2. Switch off/disengage the cruise
control temporarily.
3. Activate the cruise control and
2 adjust the speed. The button has 2
steps in each direction. Press the
button 1 step to adjust the speed
by 1 km/h. Press the button 2 steps
b358621
to adjust the speed by 5 km/h.
Complete
20170627 162
If you wish to disengage cruise control temporarily, press 0 on

the steering wheel switch. The set speed remains in the memory
as long as the engine is not switched off.
If you wish to return to the set speed, press the switch in the
steering wheel to return to the previously set speed. If, however,
you wish to engage the cruise control at your new speed, press +
or -.
Disengaging cruise control
Proceed as follows to disengage the cruise control:
• Switch off the function via the instrument cluster.
• Press 0 on the switch in the steering wheel.
• Depress the brake pedal.
• Depress the clutch pedal.
• Activate the retarder.
• Activate the exhaust brake.
Cruise control with active prediction

Note:
Cruise control must be set at a minimum of 50
km/h for active prediction to be activated.
163 Complete
20170627
Cruise control with active prediction regulates the set cruise

control speed in an economical way within a permitted speed
range. Active prediction is activated when you activate cruise
control. When the function is active, the permitted speed range
is lit green in the instrument cluster.
1 2
85 91
-15 -10 -5 +5 +10 +15
b361481
1. The symbol lights up when there is 2. The interval lights up green when
acess to map data. the function is active.
Active prediction uses map data to determine when it is time to

change the vehicle speed. The map data shows what the terrain
ahead of the vehicle looks like.
The vehicles also use map information to prioritise the choice of

gears to give more economic driving in relation to the
approaching terrain.
For example, the vehicle can:
• Change down before steep hills.
• Select a lower gear with a higher engine speed rather than

changing up and reducing the engine speed.
Complete
20170627 164
If neither map data nor GPS reception is available, active

prediction works like a normal cruise control. The symbol for
GPS reception is not displayed in the instrument cluster.
If the adaptive cruise control is activated and there is a vehicle

within the set time window, vehicle speed will not be increased.
You can cancel an ongoing raising or lowering by pressing the

switch in the steering wheel to return to the previously set
speed.

1
2 adjust the speed. The switch has 2
switch 1 step to adjust the speed
by 1 km/h. Press the switch 2 steps
b358621
Eco-roll
If suitable, eco-roll will activate automatic coasting in neutral to
reduce fuel consumption.
Eco-roll is activated when you activate cruise control with active

prediction. For more information, see Cruise control with active
prediction.
165 Complete
20170627
For eco-roll to be able to activate automatic coasting in neutral,

the following is required:
• The Opticruise lever is in the automatic position
• Performance mode economy or standard is selected
If the time window on the adaptive cruise control is set at level 1

or 2, eco-roll will operate in a restricted manner. For more
information, refer to Adaptive cruise control.
When automatic coasting in neutral is in progress, this is

indicated as follows:
• The engine speed goes down to idling speed
• N is displayed in the engaged gear field
Cancel automatic coasting in neutral by doing one of the

following:
• Switch off cruise control
• Use one of the vehicle brake systems
• Change gear manually using the Opticruise lever
• Change to a performance mode which does not support

eco-roll
• Depress the accelerator pedal
Complete
20170627 166
AEB
AEB is an advanced emergency braking system which uses a
camera and distance sensor to mitigate the effects of road
accidents with the vehicle in front.
! WARNING!
AEB is only an aid. AEB does not adapt to

driving conditions or the weather. The driver is
always responsible for driving the vehicle in a
safe manner.
Tampering with the vehicle speed signal may
cause the AEB not to function as intended or to
be activated incorrectly.
Note:
The forward looking camera must be calibrated
after the windscreen has been renewed.
Collision warning
b374154
Symbol for collision risk.
167 Complete
20170627
When AEB detects a collision risk, the system is activated in 3

stages:
1. A red warning with an audible signal is shown in the
instrument cluster.
2. If the driver does not react and the risk remains, AEB
brakes the vehicle slightly.
3. If there is no further reaction and the risk remains, AEB

brakes the vehicle with full force.
The driver can always cancel the warnings or the braking by:
• pressing the AEB switch on the instrument panel.
• Step on the accelerator pedal clearly and quickly.
• Press the accelerator pedal to the kickdown position.
At an early stage the driver can also cancel the warning by:
• Depressing the brake pedal.
• Activate the direction indicators.
The driver can always take over control of braking by pressing

the brake pedal. This cancels the warning and automatic braking.
The more critical the situation, the harder the brake pedal needs
to be pressed.
If adaptive cruise control is activated, it can indicate a collision
warning and try to alleviate the situation before AEB issues a
warning.
Complete
20170627 168
For more information, refer to the section Adaptive cruise control.
After the vehicle brakes with full force and is stationary, the
brakes will hold the vehicle for a few seconds to prevent the
vehicle from moving. The brakes are released if the driver
presses the brake or the accelerator pedal.
Activation and availability

b361033
Switch for AEB, advanced emergency brake.
AEB is activated automatically, when the power is switched on.

The lamp on the switch lights up green.
AEB can be deactivated using the switch. The lamp on the switch
lights up yellow. The switch is spring-loaded and the same switch
resets AEB.
AEB is available when:
• the vehicle speed exceeds 15 km/h.
AEB can be limited or deactivated when:
• the distance sensor is blocked or faulty.
• the camera is blocked or faulty.
• there are faults with the brake system of the vehicle or the
trailer.
169 Complete
20170627
• the air suspension of the vehicle is set far outside the

normal drive position.
• the vehicle is driven in darkness.

b377314
Symbol for limited AEB.
When AEB is limited, the symbol lights up yellow and a

corresponding message is shown in the instrument cluster.
The following messages may be displayed:
• System fault: AEB is deactivated because of a fault with

the distance sensor.
• Reduced function: AEB is limited and still partly active.

AEB may not brake or issue collision warnings in time.
1 2
1. Blocked distance sensor
b373657
2. Blocked camera
If the distance sensor or camera is blocked by dirt, snow or ice for

example, the respective symbol is shown with a corresponding
message in the instrument cluster.
If the problem is not addressed, the AEB function will be
deactivated or limited.
Complete
20170627 170
For a blocked camera, activating the windscreen wipers may be

all that is needed. Make sure you keep the camera free from dirt,
snow and ice.
Different traffic conditions
! WARNING!
AEB is only an aid and may have difficulty

identifying vehicles and locating them correctly
in certain traffic conditions. AEB may overlook a
collision risk or be activated when there is no risk
of collision.
b338366
Bends
When driving into and out of bends, it may be difficult for AEB
to identify the road ahead. AEB may therefore fail to issue a
171 Complete
20170627
warning about vehicles on the road or issue an incorrect warning

about vehicles off the road.
b338368
Slip roads and the hard shoulder.
At slip roads and when vehicles are moving on the hard shoulder
it can be difficult for AEB to identify vehicles ahead.
b338369
Switching lanes
Vehicles that are switching lanes right in front of your vehicle

cannot be identified immediately by AEB until they are within
the identification zone.
Complete
20170627 172
Adaptive cruise control
! WARNING!
The vehicle will not brake automatically for

stationary obstacles. The adaptive cruise control
only controls the distance to moving vehicles
ahead and not to stationary obstacles on the road.
! WARNING!
The vehicle will not brake automatically for

stationary obstacles. Adaptive cruise control only
controls the distance to moving vehicles ahead
and not to stationary obstacles on the road.
! WARNING!
Do not use adaptive cruise control on slippery

road surfaces. The adaptive cruise control does
not adjust the distance to vehicles ahead in
relation to the prevailing road conditions.
173 Complete
20170627
Adaptive cruise control helps the driver keep the distance to the
vehicle in front. The vehicle decelerates automatically if the
adaptive cruise control detects that the vehicle in front is
travelling more slowly. The vehicle follows the vehicle in front
with a preset time window. The vehicle resumes the set cruise
control speed as soon as the traffic situation permits.
The function is customised for driving on motorways and main
roads.
Note:
The adaptive cruise control does not ignore
AEB. AEB works as usual even when the adaptive
cruise control is activated.
The symbol is displayed in the instrument cluster when

b383383
the adaptive cruise control is active.

2. Select cruise control.
Complete
20170627 174

1
b358621

the steering wheel switch.
or -.
Switching from adaptive cruise control to normal cruise control
changes the set speed to the actual vehicle speed if this is lower
than the previously set speed.
The adaptive cruise control can adapt the vehicle’s speed down
to stationary. The function can be reactivated automatically after
being stationary for max. 3 seconds. After being stationary for a
longer period, the function must be reactivated manually by
pressing the return button (1) or by lightly depressing the
accelerator pedal. When this occurs, the following symbol is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
175 Complete
20170627

the adaptive cruise control must be reactivated
b383382
manually.
The lowest settable speed is 15 km/h.
Note:
When the vehicle approaches a stationary or
slow-moving vehicle, the adaptive cruise control
has limited possibilities to regulate the distance.
This is only possible when your vehicle is moving
at a low speed.
Take over the control of the vehicle when you, at high speed, get
close to stationary or slow-moving vehicles. Reactivate the
adaptive cruise control when the difference in vehicle speed is
low.

b383383
the adaptive cruise control is active.

2. Select cruise control.
Complete
20170627 176

1
b358621

the steering wheel switch.
or -.
Switching from adaptive cruise control to normal cruise control
changes the set speed to the actual vehicle speed if this is lower
than the previously set speed.
Adaptive cruise control cannot be activated:
• directly after engine start
• at speeds of 3 km/h or lower
• when the clutch is being operated
• when the service brake is being used
• when safety belt has been unbuckled
177 Complete
20170627
• when open driver’s door is open
• when activating certain power take-offs.
The adaptive cruise control is disconnected if the safety belt is

unbuckled or the driver’s door is opened. If this is done when the
vehicle is stationary, the parking brake is applied at the same
time.
Change the time window
Press the upper part of the switch to reduce the time

window to the vehicle ahead. Press the lower part of
the switch to increase the time window to the vehicle
b358730
ahead.
b362095
The time window has 5 levels, with 1 dash being the shortest time and 5 dashes
being the longest time between your vehicle and the distance to the vehicle in
front.
Complete
20170627 178
If the adaptive cruise control senses a vehicle ahead, this is

displayed in the instrument cluster by the vehicle lighting up.
1 2
1. The vehicle lights up

b363531
2. Speed of the vehicle in front
When the distance sensor is blocked, the symbol is

displayed together with a message in the instrument
b362094
cluster.
The symbol lights up yellow in the instrument cluster when the

adaptive cruise control is deactivated due to a blocked distance
sensor, for example. Make sure that nothing is blocking the
distance sensor.
Collision warning
b374154
Symbol for collision risk.
A red warning is shown in the instrument cluster and a buzzer

tone sounds when the prevailing traffic situation may require you
to brake heavily. The system only performs limited braking. You
179 Complete
20170627
must brake the vehicle yourself to use full brake force. The
collision warning is shown when adaptive cruise control is active.
If AEB is activated and adaptive cruise control cannot alleviate
the situation, AEB may act and apply heavy braking. AEB is
activated automatically, when the power is switched on.
For more information, refer to the section AEB.
Different traffic conditions
! WARNING!
Adaptive cruise control is only an aid and may

have difficulty identifying vehicles and locating
them correctly in certain traffic conditions.
Adaptive cruise control may overlook a collision
risk or be activated when there is no risk of
collision.
Complete
20170627 180
b338366
Bends
In bends as well as before and after bends it can be difficult for

the adaptive cruise control to identify vehicles ahead. The
vehicle may be braked unexpectedly or too late.
b338367
Sideways position
Problems may occur if your vehicle is to one side in relation to

the vehicle ahead. The adaptive cruise control may not identify a
vehicle ahead. You will have to brake yourself to increase the
distance.
181 Complete
20170627
b338368
Slip roads and the hard shoulder
At slip roads and when vehicles are moving on the hard shoulder
it can be difficult for the adaptive cruise control to identify
vehicles ahead. The vehicle may be braked unexpectedly or too
late.
b338369
Switching lanes
Vehicles that are switching lanes immediately in front of your

vehicle cannot be identified by the adaptive cruise control until
they are within the identification zone. You will have to brake
yourself to increase the distance to the vehicle which is switching
lanes.
Complete
20170627 182
Calibrating the distance sensor
! WARNING!
During calibration, AEB and adaptive cruise

control are deactivated. The systems will not
prevent collision or be activated to alleviate the
traffic conditions.
If the vehicle has been to the workshop for renewal of the

distance sensor, the distance sensor must first calibrate itself for
approx. 10 min. A message is shown in the instrument cluster
when calibration is in progress. Calibration takes place
automatically. The final part of the calibration is carried out
while driving when the distance sensor reads the surrounding
area.

b377314
the vehicle’s distance sensor is being calibrated.
Type approval for radio

The distance sensor must be type approved in accordance with
national regulations in each country.
Read more at www.scania.com/radio-type-approval-information and
the small print at the start of the manual for further information.
183 Complete
20170627
b342713
Symbol for type approval in Moldova.
Lane departure warning (LDW)

The lane departure warning (LDW) monitors the lane in front
via a camera in the windscreen and warns when one of the side
markings on the lane are unintentionally crossed. The system
does not warn you if you actively steer over the side markings.
IMPORTANT!
The lane departure warning is only an aid.
Keep the windscreen in front of the camera clean
so as not to impair the camera’s field of vision.
If the LDW is not working or is deactivated, the symbol

b209851
is displayed on the instrument cluster.
LDW gives a warning with acoustic signals in

the loudspeakers.
LDW gives a warning via an acoustic signal from the left- or
right-hand loudspeaker according to which side of the road you
Complete
20170627 184
cross the lane markings. When the warning occurs, the volume
of any music in the hi-fi system is automatically reduced.
The LDW warning takes the form of an acoustic signal when:
• You unintentionally cross the lane markings of the lane

you are driving in.
The LDW does not warn when:
• You carry out an intentional steering wheel movement

during normal steering.
• You have activated the direction indicator and for 4

seconds after it has been switched off.
It is possible to adjust when LDW warnings should occur using

driver settings.
Activation and availability

b354537
Switch for LDW.
LDW is activated automatically when the ignition is switched

on. The lamp on the switch lights up green.
LDW can be deactivated using the switch. When LDW is
deactivated, this is indicated in the instrument cluster. The lamp
on the switch lights up yellow.
185 Complete
20170627
LDW is available when:
• The speed exceeds 60 km/h and the system can identify at

least 1 line. The function is switched off when the speed
falls below 55 km/h.
LDW is limited when:
• The camera cannot read the lane markings because of

snow, gravel or similar on the road surface.
• There are no clear side markings.
• You are driving on a sharp bend.
• The sun is dazzling the camera.
• Rain, snow or fog obscures the camera’s field of vision.
When the camera’s field of vision is blocked, the

symbol is displayed together with a message in the
b340513
instrument cluster.
If the camera is still blocked after 30 seconds, the

symbol is displayed together with a message that the
b209851
function for LDW is limited.
Driver settings
It is possible to adjust how LDW should behave in different
situations. Carry out the change in the instrument cluster.
Complete
20170627 186
Warning distance
There are 3 different levels of sensitivity when LDW gives a

warning when the vehicle approaches the lane side markers.
• Early
• Normal (default setting)
• Late
Advanced lane departure warning
This setting looks at driving behaviours and the situations in

which LDW gives a warning.
• Activated (default setting) – LDW does not give a
warning for intentional infringements.
• Deactivated - LDW always gives a warning, apart from

when the direction indicator is activated.
Scania Driver Support

Scania Driver Support makes it easier for you, the driver, to
develop and maintain a driving style that reduces fuel
consumption and wear. Driver support is easy to use and gives
tips and a driving score in the instrument cluster display while
driving.
Driver support gives you a driving score in 4 categories:
• Hill driving
• Use of brakes
187 Complete
20170627
• Anticipation
• Choice of gears
Hill driving
b363520
Symbol for hill driving
Release the accelerator in good time before a downhill slope or

the top of a hill to minimise the need for braking further down
the slope. The driving score is based on the increase in vehicle
speed on the slope, use of brakes and the reduction in vehicle
speed before the downhill slope started.
If map information is available for the route, driver support can
give tips on releasing the accelerator before a downhill slope
starts. How soon before the slope the tip is provided depends on
the performance mode selected.
Increase the vehicle speed before an uphill slope to avoid losing

too much speed on the slope and to avoid changing down gears
unnecessarily.
The driving score is not adversely affected if you cannot
accelerate in this manner.
b363519
Symbol for gaining speed before an uphill slope
Complete
20170627 188
A driving score is not given if:
• Adaptive cruise control is activated and there is a vehicle

in front of you controlling the speed.
• Cruise control with active prediction is activated.
Use of brakes
b338032
Symbol for use of brakes
Driver support analyses use of the service brake, engine brake

and auxiliary brake. Driver support calculates how much power
the engine brake and auxiliary brake can contribute in different
situations. The engine brake and auxiliary brake give high
driving scores.
During light braking with the service brake, the engine also
brakes. In these situations, a high driving score may be given
even though no auxiliary brake is activated. Repeated, short
braking and braking at low starting speeds do not generate a
driving score. Driver support encourages the use of the auxiliary
brake as much as possible.
The driving score for braking is given only when the braking has
finished. Braking is finished when the vehicle has stopped or
acceleration begins. In certain conditions the analysis is switched
off, if the automatic retarder is deactivated.
189 Complete
20170627
Anticipation b363518
Symbol for anticipation
High driving score in anticipation is awarded in situations where

you coast longer before you start braking or you adjust to the
speed in a traffic queue.
Driving score for anticipation is given as soon as braking begins.
A braking that is done entirely using the engine brake is awarded
maximum points.
Choice of gears
b363517
Symbol for choice of gears
Driver support analyses how the choice of gears affects fuel

consumption and suggests which gear is the most fuel-efficient.
Use the suggested gears to obtain a high driving score.
Driver support encourages driving at low engine speeds. This
means that the advice to change to a lower gear can come fairly
late, for example when on an uphill slope.
Higher driving scores are also given during normal driving when
Opticruise is in automatic mode if either Standard or Economy
performance mode is selected.
Complete
20170627 190
Clutch use
Driver support evaluates the starting gear you have selected, how
much you slip the clutch and how you use the accelerator pedal
when driving off. If the energy used when driving off is high,
suggestions are given as to what can be changed when you next
drive off.
Performance modes
Select the economy performance mode or standard mode for the
best fuel economy.
If power or off-road performance mode is selected, the driver
support will monitor the power usage and speed variations and
analyse if the selected performance mode is the most suitable
choice. If this is not the case, the driver support will give tips on
this. If power mode or off-road mode is selected no driver tips
regarding gear changing will be given. The analysis will remain
the same.
Display in instrument cluster

Driver support is always active and evaluates how the vehicle is
being driven even if other information is shown in the
instrument cluster. The display in the instrument cluster must be
activated manually.
b363515
191 Complete
20170627
You find the view for driver support under the menu for journey
information in the instrument cluster. The view shows a driving
score for each category. When a score is given for a category, the
other categories are dimmed for a few seconds.
60 %
100 %
83 %
The view shows the score as a
56 %
b363933
percentage for each category.
It is also possible to add a driver assistance view in one of the

instrument cluster’s selectable fields. When a score is awarded
for a category it is displayed across the entire selectable field for
a few seconds.
60 % 100 %
83 % 56 %
b364510
Score view in a selectable field.
Driver tips
Tips from the driver assistance are displayed in the instrument

cluster display. It is possible to set when tips from the driver
assistance system are to be displayed in the instrument cluster.
The following display selections can be set via the instrument

cluster’s settings:
• Tips are always displayed irrespective of view.
Complete
20170627 192
• Tips are only displayed when the view for driver

assistance is displayed.
• Tips are switched off completely.
Reset driver score
The driving score can be reset manually by the instrument

cluster.
Proceed as follows to reset:

1. Navigate to the display view for driver assistance in the
instrument cluster.
2. Press the OK button in the steering wheel.
3. Select Reset in the menu shown and confirm with the

OK button.
The driving score is reset automatically when changing the

driver card.
Idling speed adjustment

Use the switch below and the brake pedal to adjust the idling
speed.
1. Return to previously saved engine

1
3 speed.
2. Shut off the idle adjustment
function temporarily.
b358621
2 3. Adjust the idling speed.
193 Complete
20170627
You can adjust the idling speed according to the table below:
Engine Fuel Idling speed

range
9-litre Diesel/Gas 500-700 rpm
13-litre Diesel 500-700 rpm
16-litre Diesel 500-700 rpm
Make sure the cruise control or adaptive cruise control is selected

in the instrument cluster and that the engine is at running
temperature.
1. Press down the brake pedal and hold it lightly

depressed.
2. Hold in the reset button (1) for at least 3 seconds.
3. Adjust the engine speed with + and - (3).
4. Save the new idling speed by holding in the reset button

(1) for at least 3 seconds.
5. Release the brake pedal.
The idling speed set remains even when the engine is switched
off. The idling speed can also be adjusted by a Scania workshop.
Complete
20170627 194
Adaptive idling
A current consumption which is too high in relation to the
alternator capacity can cause discharging of the vehicle batteries.
Temporarily raised idling prevents discharging of the batteries,
because a higher engine speed increases the charging capacity.
The function is automatically activated where necessary and
deactivated when the requirement for increased charging
capacity has been met.
195 Complete
20170627
Road-holding
Road-holding
Air suspension
The ELC system controls the vehicle level by checking and
controlling the air pressure in the bellows at the same time as
measuring the vehicle level. This ensures that the current vehicle
level is maintained regardless of the load on the axles. The ELC
system detects the vehicle level via electric sensors which are
fitted on the frame and are connected to each respective axle.
The symbol is displayed with an error message when a

b373614
fault has occurred in the ELC system.
Slow vehicle level control

This function ensures that the vehicle level remains constant
regardless of the load on the axles. The vehicle level is
automatically controlled once a minute.
Note:
Slow vehicle level control only takes place when
the speed is above 1 km/h.
Complete
20170627 196
Road-holding
Quick control of vehicle level

When the vehicle is completely stationary, the vehicle level is
automatically controlled once a second. This function is
intended to ensure that the desired vehicle level is maintained
during loading and unloading. Level control operates
automatically even when the standby function is activated.
Note:
Fast level control only takes places when the
speed is lower than 1 km/h.
Automatic vehicle level control when the

power is activated
When the power is activated, the vehicle returns to the vehicle
level it was at before the power was switched off. Depending on
the vehicle’s specification, other alternatives may apply.
Releasing the parking brake

The front axle parking brake is released automatically during
rear level control and during load transfer and tag axle lift,
provided that the vehicle is stationary and the power is switched
on. This is intended to facilitate level control and protect the
frame.
The parking brake is applied again if any of the following occur:
• The speed is not 0.
197 Complete
20170627
Road-holding
• The Stop button on the operation unit is pressed.
Axle weight distribution

The axle weight distribution function controls the load
distribution between the half shaft and tag axle.
The function can control the distribution in 2 ways depending

on the vehicle’s specification:
• Constant relation of distribution between the tag axle and

the half shaft.
• Distribution primarily to the half shaft.
Alternative vehicle levels

b358785
Alternative vehicle level switch.
You can switch between normal drive level and alternative drive
level using the switch. When you press the upper part of the
switch, the vehicle adopts the normal drive level. When you
press the lower part of the switch, the vehicle adopts an
alternative drive level.
Complete
20170627 198
Road-holding
Note:
The maximum permitted speed for changing
vehicle levels is 30 km/h.
This symbol is displayed in the instrument cluster

b373615
when the vehicle is not at normal drive level.

b358724
Memory level switch.
The switch allows you to set the vehicle at a previously saved

memory level. When you press the relevant memory level, the
vehicle adopts the previously saved memory level.
Proceed as follows to save memory levels:

1. Set the axles to the required position
2. Hold in the memory level button for at least 5 seconds
Tag axle lift

Make sure that the wheels are pointing straight ahead in the
direction of travel when raising or lowering the tag axle.
199 Complete
20170627
Road-holding
Press the upper part of the switch to raise the tag axle. Press the
lower part of the switch to lower the tag axle. When the tag axle
is raised, the vehicle level can be raised.
When the vehicle is loaded, the options for lifting the tag axle
are limited.
b358781
Tag axle lift switch

b358778
Switch for tag axle lift on the first axle.

b358780
Switch for tag axle lift on the last axle.
Complete
20170627 200
Road-holding
b358779
Tag axle lift switch on trailer.
Load transfer
Load transfer is used to temporarily increase the pressure on the
driving axle.
b358784
Switch for activating load transfer.
Load transfer in accordance with EC97/27
Note:
The load transfer function only works if you are
driving at speeds below 30 km/h.
201 Complete
20170627
Road-holding
IMPORTANT!
Remember to start the vehicle carefully after load
transfers of more than 13 tonnes. Otherwise, the
powertrain and rear axle may be damaged.
Press the upper part of the switch rapidly to carry out a load
transfer, which increases the load on the driving axle to the
maximum. Press the bottom part of the switch rapidly to
interrupt the load transfer. When the vehicle is in load-
transferred mode, the vehicle level can be raised.
Symbol displayed in the instrument cluster when load

b374065
transfer is activated.
If you are driving a vehicle with double-drive bogie, the bogie

differential lock must be engaged when you carry out a load
transfer.

when you cannot carry out a load transfer because the
b374061
bogie differential lock is not engaged.
Complete
20170627 202
Road-holding
Information about the load

b384091
distribution is displayed in the
3.0 4.0 6.0 instrument cluster.
The regulations for maximum permissible load transfer are

governed by legal requirements in each country.
Manual load transfer
IMPORTANT!
Remember to start the vehicle carefully after load
transfers of more than 13 tonnes. Otherwise, the
powertrain and rear axle may be damaged.
On some markets you have the option to carry out load transfer
gradually up to a predefined limit.
The load transfer can be controlled via the switch as follows:

1. Keep the switch pressed in the upper position to start or
increase the load transfer.
2. Keep the switch pressed in the lower position to reduce

the load transfer.
203 Complete
20170627
Road-holding
3. Set the switch in the centre position to lock the set load
transfer.
4. If the switch is pressed in the lower position for less than

2 seconds, the load transfer is switched off.
Symbol displayed in the instrument cluster when load

b374065
transfer is activated.
If you are driving a vehicle with double-drive bogie, the bogie

differential lock must be engaged when you carry out a load
transfer.

when you cannot carry out a load transfer because the
b374061
bogie differential lock is not engaged.
Information about the load

distribution is displayed in the
b384091
3.0 4.0 6.0 instrument cluster.
The regulations for maximum permissible load transfer are

governed by legal requirements in each country.
Complete
20170627 204
Road-holding
Axle weight regulation, tag axle

With the switches, you can manually or automatically regulate
axle weight on the tag axle. This is done by changing the air
pressure in the air bellows. Air pressure in the air bellows has
only two modes – full or empty. In empty mode, a low air
pressure remains to protect the air bellows from folding damage.
1 2
1. Switch for manual and automatic
mode
2. Switch to regulate axle weight on
b358625
tag axle
Automatic mode
The switch (1) is in automatic mode when the upper part of the
switch is depressed. In automatic mode, axle weight regulation is
completely automatic. The air bellows are filled when the vehicle
is heavily laden and emptied when the load is tilted.
Manual mode
Use manual mode to manually regulate air pressure in the air

bellows. This may be necessary if automatic regulation is not
satisfactory or if the vehicle driving wheels spin against the
surface. Driving wheel grip increases when the tag axle air
bellows are emptied.
205 Complete
20170627
Road-holding
Note:
The other axles are loaded heavily if you empty
the air bellows when the vehicle is heavily laden.
Manual regulation should therefore only occur in
the event of acute need of increased grip with the
driving wheels.
Proceed as follows to regulate air pressure in the bellows:

1. On switch (1). Pull down the lock button and press the
lower part of the switch (1), MAN.
Manual mode is now activated and you can regulate air pressure
in the bellows with the switch (2).
2. Press the lower part of the switch (2) to fill the air
bellows. Press the upper part of the switch to empty the
air bellows.
Important when reversing and loading

Reverse the vehicle carefully to prevent damage to the air
bellows of the tag axle from sharp or hard objects.
Complete
20170627 206
Road-holding
b213145
Tag axle air bellows
When loading:
• Park the vehicle so that the wheels stand straight forward

in the direction of travel.
• Distribute the load evenly on the platform so that the

load is properly distributed on all axles.
• Avoid turning the steering wheel when the vehicle is

stationary.
Operation unit for air suspension

You can use the operation unit to raise and lower the vehicle and
semi-trailer levels. Activate the operation unit by pressing one of
the axle selection buttons. The vehicle speed must be less than 30
km/h in order to change level.
207 Complete
20170627
Road-holding
Note:
When blackout lighting is active, it is impossible
to adjust vehicle level with the air suspension
operation unit. Use the switches on the
instrument panel when blackout lighting is
active.
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
b333954
1. Front axle on vehicle 5. Adjusting height

2. Rear axle on vehicle 6. Return to normal vehicle level
3. Front axle on semi-trailer 7. Stop button
4. Rear axle on semi-trailer 8. Memory levels
Complete
20170627 208
Road-holding
1 2
3
4
b333955
1. Front axle on vehicle 4. Return to normal vehicle level
2. Rear axle on vehicle 5. Stop button
3. Adjusting height 6. Memory levels
209 Complete
20170627
Road-holding
2
3
b333956
1. Rear axle on vehicle 4. Stop button
2. Adjusting height 5. Memory levels
3. Return to normal vehicle level
Change vehicle level

Press the button for the axle on which you wish to change the
level. You can also press several buttons to change the level of
several axles at the same time. When you have selected an axle
the corresponding indicator lamp comes on.
Press the buttons to raise or lower to the required level. Release
the button to cancel.
Press the stop button to cancel an ongoing chassis movement.
Complete
20170627 210
Road-holding
Memory levels
You can save 4 memory levels by programming them using the
operation unit.
Proceed as follows to save memory levels:

1. Activating the operation unit
2. Setting the axles to the required position
3. Press the memory level button for 5 seconds. When the

operation unit flashes, the level has been saved.
Proceed as follows to activate a memory level:

1. Activating the operation unit
2. Press the relevant memory level button
Standby
You can change and retain the vehicle and semi-trailer levels
even if the vehicle’s power is switched off. The standby function
is activated by pressing one of the level control buttons within 15
seconds of switching off the power with the starter key.
When the standby function is activated, the text Level control
active is displayed in the instrument cluster for 5 seconds.
The standby function is cancelled in one of the following ways:
• By pressing the stop button for at least 2 seconds when

the operation unit is activated.
211 Complete
20170627
Road-holding
• By switching on the power supply.
• After 59 minutes.
• If there is a fault in the system.
At a workshop you can change the setting for the period after
which the standby function is cancelled. You can choose to have
it cancelled after 15 or 30 minutes instead.
Manual level control

Note:
When rapidly unloading heavy loads, in which
tractors or cranes lift the whole load in one go, it
is advisable to lower the vehicle level as much as
possible. This is to avoid shock to the air bellows
when they expand.
Note:
The vehicle speed must be less than 30 km/h in
order to change vehicle level.
Complete
20170627 212
Road-holding
Switch for manually raising and lowering the rear part

b358783
of the vehicle.
Press the switch for raising and lowering the vehicle level on the
rear part of the vehicle.
Switch for manually raising and lowering the front

b358782
part of the vehicle.
Press the switch to raise or lower the vehicle level at the front
part of the vehicle.
If a change of vehicle level passes driving height, the function

stops automatically. To continue raising or lowering, press the
switch again.
Standby
You can change and retain the vehicle and semi-trailer levels
even if the vehicle’s power is switched off. The standby function
is activated by pressing one of the level adjustment buttons
within 15 seconds of switching off the power with the starter key.
213 Complete
20170627
Road-holding
When the standby function is activated, the text Level

adjustment active is displayed in the instrument cluster for 5
seconds.
The standby function is cancelled in one of the following ways:
• By pressing the stop button on the operation unit for at

least 2 seconds when the operation unit is activated.
• By switching on the power supply.
• After 59 minutes.
• If there is a fault in the system.
At a workshop you can change the setting for the period after
which the standby function is cancelled. You can choose to have
it cancelled after 15 or 30 minutes instead.
Complete
20170627 214
Mobility
Mobility
Selectable front wheel drive
The vehicle is equipped with selectable front wheel drive.
Selectable front wheel drive gives you the option of influencing
the vehicle‘s operating economy and mobility.
Engage front wheel drive when you are driving:
• off made-up roads (off-road).
• on slippery surfaces.
• on very steep gradients.
Drive without front wheel drive on a normal road surface. It

provides better operating economy and the truck is easier to
operate, especially at low speeds.
Engaging and disengaging front wheel drive

The appearance of the rotary control may vary slightly from
vehicle to vehicle depending on the number of differential locks.
Examples of rotary controls for

differential locks and selectable
b358898
front wheel drive.
215 Complete
20170627
Mobility
Engage front wheel drive by turning the differential lock rotary

control. You can engage front wheel drive when the vehicle is
moving, but not when the wheels are spinning on the ground.
Avoid engaging front wheel drive at high speed or at high engine
speed as this puts a heavy load on the clutch and power
transmission.
Front wheel drive status; the progress of the engagement
The front wheel drive status is displayed in the instrument

cluster.
1. Front wheel drive not engaged.

2. Front wheel drive is engaged.
3. Front wheel drive engaged.
4. Front wheel drive is disengaged.
b212948
5. Front wheel drive not engaged.
Disengage front wheel drive by turning the rotary control. The

clutch does not need to be used. Disengage front wheel drive
when it is not required.
If the vehicle is equipped with ABS, the front wheel drive will be
disengaged when the ABS system is controlling braking. This is
because the brake system needs to measure the difference in
speed between the front and rear axles. When ABS control of the
braking has finished and the wheels are rotating at the same
speed, the differential lock can be engaged again.
Complete
20170627 216
Mobility
IMPORTANT!
Only engage front wheel drive when the wheels
have a good grip on the road surface. If the wheels
are skidding on the road surface, the truck must
be stationary before you engage front wheel drive.
Differential lock
Rotary control for differential

b358255
lock.

b387277
lock.
You can engage and disengage the differential lock via the rotary
control while driving provided that no wheels are spinning. If
you engage the differential lock when the wheels are spinning,
217 Complete
20170627
Mobility
there is a risk of it being damaged. The instrument cluster

indicates whether the differential lock is engaged or not.
Driving on good road surfaces with the differential lock

continually engaged increases fuel consumption and tyre wear
and can also shorten the service life of vehicle components.
Symbol displayed in the instrument cluster when a

b374066
differential lock is engaged.
Differential lock on front axle

The differential lock on the front axle forces the right and left
front wheels to rotate at the same speed to increase mobility.
Differential lock on rear axle

The differential lock on the rear axle forces the right and left rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed to increase mobility.
! WARNING!
The steering of the vehicle is impaired when the

differential lock is engaged.
Complete
20170627 218
Mobility
Sequence of differential lock engagement on

front and rear axle
The differential lock engagement sequence is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
1. Differential lock is not engaged.

2. The differential lock is engaged.
3. Differential lock is engaged.
4. The differential lock is disengaged.
b212741
Differential lock on double-drive bogie

The differential lock on the double-drive bogie forces the front
and rear driving axles to rotate at the same speed. The
differential lock provides better mobility without affecting the
steering of the vehicle.
Differential lock on the transfer gearbox

The differential lock in the transfer box forces the front and rear
axles to rotate at the same speed to improve mobility.
If the vehicle is equipped with ABS, the differential lock in the
transfer gearbox will be disengaged when the ABS system is
controlling braking. This is because the brake system needs to
measure the difference in speed between the front and rear axles.
When ABS control of the braking has finished and the wheels are
219 Complete
20170627
Mobility
rotating at the same speed, the differential lock will be

automatically engaged again.
Sequence of differential lock engagement on

tandem bogie and transfer gearbox
The differential lock engagement sequence is displayed in the
instrument cluster.

2. The differential lock is engaged.
3. Differential lock is engaged.
4. The differential lock is disengaged.
b212948
Low gear in transfer box

IMPORTANT!
Low gear should be engaged in the transfer
gearbox when the vehicle is used off-road so as
not to cause damage to the transfer gearbox.
b358726
Switch for low gear in transfer box
Complete
20170627 220
Mobility
Engaging and disengaging low gear

In order to engage and disengage low gear in the transfer
gearbox, the following conditions must be met:
• Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.
• The vehicle must be completely stationary.
• The normal gear lever must be in neutral.
Engage and disengage low gear via the switch. The instrument
cluster indicates whether low gear is engaged or disengaged.
Drive wheel disengagement

Drive wheel disengagement means that you can put the transfer
box into neutral during towing or when you are using a power
take-off on the transfer box.
b358899
Drive wheel disengagement switch
When the transfer gearbox is in the neutral position, the

following symbol is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Symbol that is displayed when the transfer gearbox is

b383892
in the neutral position.
221 Complete
20170627
Mobility
Disengagement
IMPORTANT!
If the vehicle is without power or without
compressed air, the propeller shafts on both the
front and rear axle must be detached before
towing. This must be carried out when towing
with or without the front axle raised.
Avoid damage to the main gearbox and the transfer box when
towing by first taking the following action. If the transfer box is
equipped with a power take-off, take the following action before
activating the power take-off.
1. Turn the starter key to the drive position.
2. Put the gear lever in neutral position and the range

switch in its upper position, high range area. If the
vehicle is equipped with an automatic gearbox, put the
drive mode selector in neutral.
3. Activate the switch for drive wheel disengagement.
The instrument cluster indicates that the drive is disengaged.
Complete
20170627 222
Mobility
IMPORTANT!
As long as drive wheel disengagement is activated,
the main gearbox must also be in neutral.
Otherwise the transfer gearbox will be damaged
due to a lack of lubrication. This does not apply to
special models which are equipped with a power
take-off or integrated oil pump.
Engaging
Proceed as follows to engage the drive:

1. Ensure that the vehicle is stationary.
2. If the vehicle is equipped with automatic gearbox,

activate the gearbox neutral position.
3. Depress the brake pedal and hold it in the depressed

position.
4. Return the switch to the inactive position. The green

LED of the switch goes out.
The instrument cluster indicates that the drive is engaged.
ESP
ESP activates the service brake on the relevant wheel and the
trailer brakes. ESP can also reduce the engine torque. ESP
reduces the risk of the vehicle skidding or overturning.
223 Complete
20170627
Mobility
Drive carefully when you have a moving load or when the load
has a high centre of gravity.
If you experience ESP is activated sooner or later than expected,
this may be due to one of the following:
• Choice of tyre
• Load
• Vehicle wear
• Driving style
The symbol flashes in the instrument cluster when ESP

b357932
is activated.
ESP on your vehicle cannot be disengaged.
On some vehicles, ESP settings can be changed so that it can be

disengaged using the Traction Control (TC) switch. Contact
your Scania workshop.
b353466
Switch for traction control.
ESP on your vehicle can temporarily be disengaged. Hold in the

switch for 3 seconds to disconnect ESP. The ESP symbol comes
on with a yellow light in the instrument cluster. For more
information, refer to the section Traction Control (TC).
Complete
20170627 224
Mobility

locks with a button for traction
b358255
control.
ESP on your vehicle can temporarily be disengaged. Hold in the

button for 3 seconds to disconnect ESP. The ESP symbol
illuminates with a white light in the instrument cluster. For more
information, refer to the section Traction Control (TC).
Do not connect to several trailers with different brake systems. If

this occurs it can create dangerous traffic conditions.
Traction Control (TC)

Traction control prevents wheel spin on the driving wheels by
reducing the engine torque and braking spinning wheels.
Traction control also prevents the driving wheels from locking if
you brake with the retarder or release the accelerator pedal too
rapidly. This is achieved by increasing the engine torque when
there is a tendency for the wheels to lock.
Overall this provides the following benefits:
• Better stability with a reduced risk of skidding.
• Improved hill-climbing ability.
• Easier to drive off from a stationary position.
225 Complete
20170627
Mobility
• Reduced wear on tyres and powertrain.
• Maintained steerability when driving with the differential

lock engaged.
Traction control is normally engaged.
The symbol flashes in the instrument cluster when

b357932
traction control is activated.
The symbol may also flash in the instrument cluster when ESP
is active. For more information, refer to the section ESP.
If there is a risk of the wheels locking when you change down or
use the retarder with a gear engaged, the engine torque increases
automatically.
The control for the traction control is located in the rotary
control for the differential locks or in a separate switch. The
vehicle’s powertrain, gearboxes and all-wheel drive (if fitted)
determine the design and location of the controls.
b353466
Switch for traction control.
Complete
20170627 226
Mobility

locks with a button for traction
b358255
control.
Off-road mode
The symbol lights white when off-road mode is

b200344
activated.
A short press on the control will activate off-road mode. Use off-
road mode when driving in sand, gravel or deep snow, for
example.
When off-road mode is active, more wheel spin is allowed.
Off-road mode is activated automatically if performance mode
O, off-road is activated. A short press on the control will return
to normal mode. For further information refer to the section
Opticruise. The functionality can be adjusted at a Scania
workshop.
Switch off traction control

Press the control to switch off traction control.
227 Complete
20170627
Mobility
b200344
The symbol is lit yellow when traction control is off.
Switch off traction control

Press on the control and keep it pressed in for 3 seconds to switch
off traction control.
b200344
The symbol is lit yellow when traction control is off.
Roller brake test mode

Press the control and keep it pressed in for six seconds to allow
the wheels to rotate at a different speed to the front axle. This can
be used when performing a roller brake test or when washing
wheels.
A short press on the control will deactivate roller brake test
mode. If the vehicle speed exceeds 10 km/h, roller brake test
mode is deactivated automatically.
The symbol is displayed with text in the instrument

cluster when the wheels have been allowed to rotate
b200344
at different speeds.
Complete
20170627 228
Mobility
Workshop position
Press on the control and keep it pressed in for 9 seconds to
activate the workshop position. When the workshop mode is
active, a speed of 70 km/h when braking is simulated. Workshop
position should not be activated in normal operating conditions.
A short press on the control will deactivate workshop mode.
EST
! WARNING!
Never stay in the vicinity of the tag axle wheel

housing without the battery master switch being
off, as there is a risk of crush injury.
Self-test
When the voltage is switched on, the system carries out a self-
test which takes about 5 seconds. During the test, whining and
clicking sounds may occur. This is normal.
System fault
The symbol is shown in the instrument cluster if a fault

b200356
occurs with EST. The symbol may be lit yellow or red.
229 Complete
20170627
Mobility
Red warning
If a serious fault occurs in the EST system, a red symbol is

displayed in the instrument cluster. Proceed as follows:
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe place
2. Apply the parking brake
3. Switch off the voltage
4. Switch on the voltage
When the voltage is activated again, the system will

automatically troubleshoot and perform diagnostics itself.
Whining and clicking sounds may occur. This is normal and
troubleshooting takes approximately 1 minute. Allow the test to
complete.
Contact a Scania workshop if the fault persists after
troubleshooting.
If it is possible to raise the tag axle, raise the tag axle and drive to
a Scania workshop. If it is not possible to raise the tag axle, the
vehicle must not be driven. Request recovery.
Yellow warning
If the symbol lights up yellow in the instrument cluster, the

vehicle can still be driven; increased tyre wear may occur.
Contact a Scania workshop for checking.
Complete
20170627 230
Gear changing and braking

Gear changing
The gearbox consists of a 4-speed main gearbox with crawl gear,
a 2-speed range part and a reverse gear.
5 3
1 8
RL 6 4
2
b203761
The gearbox consists of a 4-speed main gearbox with a 2-speed

range part and a reverse gear.
231 Complete
20170627
H
8
7
7
6
H
5
L 4
3
2 8
L
141 506
1
b204295
The gearbox consists of a 3-speed main gearbox with crawl gear,
2-speed range part, 2-speed splitter gear and a reverse gear.
5H
5L
1 2H
2L
6H
6L
RH 4H
3H
RL 4L
2 3L
1H
1L
CH
CL
b203762
1. Splitter 2. Range
Complete
20170627 232
The gearbox consists of a 3-speed main gearbox with a 2-speed

range part, 2-speed splitter gear and a reverse gear.
5H
1 5L
2H
2L
6H
6L
2 RH 4H
3H
RL 4L
3L
1H
b203760
1L
1. Splitter 2. Range
The vehicle is equipped with a servo-assisted gear shift system.

The servo-assisted gear shift system facilitates gear changing by
strengthening the power applied to the gear lever. This means
that less power than normal is required to change gear.
Note:
If too much power is applied to the gear lever, the
servo-assisted gear shift system will shut down to
protect the gearbox. It is activated again once the
power on the gear lever is reduced. If the servo-
assisted gear shift system is shut down, gear
shifting will become very stiff.
233 Complete
20170627
Engine overspeed protection
To protect the engine and clutch against engine overspeed, the

vehicle comes with engine overspeed protection. It prevents gear
shifting if the speed is too high for the desired gear by locking the
gear lever in the neutral position. Select a higher gear or reduce
the speed to release the gear lever.
Crawl gear
The crawl gears are for extremely heavy starts and operating at
crawling speed. Do not use the crawl gears to get out. The crawl
gears are so low that they are only required in exceptional
circumstances.
Crawl gear
The crawl gears are for extremely heavy starts and operating at
crawling speed. Do not use the crawl gears to get out. The crawl
gears are so low that they are only required in exceptional
circumstances.
You can choose between high and low splitter gear mode when
driving in crawl gears.
Complete
20170627 234
Range gear
Note:
Reverse gear must be used only in low range so
that the gearbox is not damaged.
Note:
Always start in low range with first gear selected
when the vehicle is loaded to prevent overloading
of the clutch and gearbox.
The range gear doubles the gear steps in the main gearbox. The
switch between high and low range takes place when the gear
lever passes the neutral position.
Proceed as follows to change between high and low range:

1. Select high or low range using the switch on the gear
lever.
2. Depress the clutch pedal.
3. Move the gear lever to the neutral position and then on

to the required gear position (for example, back to the
previous position).
4. Release the clutch pedal.
235 Complete
20170627
Gear shift interlock when engaging range gear
The vehicle is equipped with a gear shift interlock that locks the
gear lever in neutral position while engaging range gear. When
the range gear is engaged, the catch releases and gear shifting can
continue.
In cold climates it can sometimes be a problem when changing
down to the low range. The gear shift interlock will then release
after 3 seconds to allow the gear lever to be moved to a gear
position. The gear lever must then be moved back to neutral
position to start making a new attempt to change down to low
range.
Splitter gear
The splitter gear splits each gear ratio into high and low. The
switch between high and low splitter gear mode takes place when
you depress the clutch pedal.
Do the following to change between high and low splitter gear

mode:
1. Select splitter gear using the switch on the gear lever.
2. Depress the clutch pedal.
3. Release the clutch pedal.
Complete
20170627 236
Blocked range gear changing

In certain situations, you are prevented from changing gear in
range to protect the gearbox.
Low range interlock
To protect the engine and clutch against engine overspeed, the

vehicle comes with low range interlock. It prevents changing
down to the low range, if the speed is too high, by locking the
gear lever in the neutral position. The gear lever is locked until
the speed is reduced and the low range can be engaged, or until
the high range is selected.
Blocked range gear changing if there is a fault in the gear

change system
b374155
Gear change fault, symbol in the instrument cluster.
With certain faults in the gear change system, range gear

changing is blocked completely. If high range is blocked and you
must switch to low range to drive the vehicle to the workshop,
you can test the following procedure.
Proceed as follows to change the range in case of gear change

errors:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Apply the parking brake.
237 Complete
20170627
3. Switch off the engine.
4. Release the clutch.
5. Turn the key to the drive position.
6. Engage low range within 10 seconds of turning the key

to the drive position.
Gear when parking

Always park with the gear lever in the neutral position and the
low range selected.
Gear when towing
IMPORTANT!
The engine must be running and the clutch pedal
must be released when towing or moving.
Otherwise the oil pump is not driven, which may
cause the gearbox to be damaged. If it is not
possible to run the engine, the propeller shaft or
half shafts must be removed.
High range must be engaged when tow-starting and shunting the

vehicle.
Complete
20170627 238
Adjusting the gear lever

Contact a Scania workshop if you want to adjust the position of
the gear lever.
Clutch monitoring
The vehicle has a function which reduces wear on the clutch.
The clutch is exposed to wear when starting with a heavy load.
The function affects the engine speed so that it will not be too
high when starting from a stationary position. The maximum
engine speed is limited by the function to 750 rpm. In some
situations it is necessary to increase the engine speed. The
procedure is described below.
Increasing the maximum engine speed

If you lock any of the differential locks in a rear axle, the
maximum engine speed limit is increased to 1,100 rpm. The
performance is increased in that position. When you have
pressed the switch, it may take the differential lock some time to
lock. You can only increase the engine speed when the
differential lock is locked.
Temporary increase of engine speed

You can temporarily increase the engine speed by depressing and
holding the accelerator pedal in the kickdown position. The
engine speed then slowly increases, reaching 1,100 rpm at the
most. If you release the accelerator pedal, the engine speed stops
239 Complete
20170627
increasing. The temporary increase of engine speed operates

until the vehicle reaches 10 km/h.
Collapsible gear lever
1
b384706
The vehicle is equipped with a collapsible gear lever to free up

space in the cab.
Proceed as follows to fold the gear lever down:

1. Pull the catch upwards to unlock the gear lever’s folding
mechanism.
2. Fold the gear lever down towards the floor.
Proceed as follows to fold the gear lever up:
• Fold the gear lever up until it clicks. The gear lever is

then locked in the upright position.
Opticruise
Opticruise is a system which allows a manual gearbox to change
gear automatically.
Complete
20170627 240
The vehicle may be equipped with a low cruising speed function.

Low cruising speed means that the vehicle calculates when it is
possible to save fuel by reducing the engine speed more than
normal at low loads. Low cruising speed is only engaged if you
drive with Opticruise in automatic mode.
1. Drive mode selector. The drive

1 2 mode selector must be moved
towards the steering wheel before
you can turn it to the R position.
2. Move the Opticruise lever towards
you to step up ( + ) or away from
you to step down ( - ).
3
3. Select between automatic A or
b363530
manual M gear changing.
The Opticruise lever can appear differently depending on the

vehicle’s configuration.
Information in the instrument cluster

The instrument cluster shows information and error messages
for Opticruise.
1. Current gear
2. Drive position
3
2
b363536
3. Next gear
241 Complete
20170627

for Opticruise.
1. Current gear
1 2
2. Drive position
3
b363949
3. Next gear
Starting the vehicle
Proceed as follows to start the vehicle:

1. Set the drive mode selector on the Opticruise lever to
neutral position, N.
2. Turn the key to the start position.

drive position; D.
The vehicle will only start with the drive mode selector in neutral
position.
Parking
Proceed as follows to park:

Complete
20170627 242
Note:
If the drive mode selector is not in neutral
position when the key is turned to the lock
position, the system puts the gearbox into neutral
position. However, the drive mode selector on
the Opticruise lever remains in the position you
left it.
Driving modes
Drive position
Set the drive mode selector on the Opticruise lever to drive

position D.
The behaviour in drive mode is dependent on if you have
selected automatic or manual changing. Do not leave the vehicle
stationary in drive mode, D.
Neutral position
Set the drive mode selector on the Opticruise lever to neutral

position, N.
Reverse mode
Set the drive mode selector on the Opticruise lever to reverse

position, R. You can select R while driving, but reverse gear will
not be engaged until the vehicle has stopped.
243 Complete
20170627
On gearboxes with a splitter gear, you can choose between low

reverse (R1) and high reverse (R2). To select low reverse, move
the Opticruise lever away from you. To select high reverse, move
the Opticruise lever towards you. You can switch between low
reverse or high reverse when the vehicle is moving. Opticruise
automatically selects the reverse gear you last used the next time
you select reverse, R.
Gear changing positions

Switch between automatic and manual gear changing by pressing
the A/M button on the Opticruise lever. In the standard and
economy performance modes, manual gear changing can be
blocked at speeds above 50 km/h.
Automatic gear changing
In automatic gear change mode, A Opticruise changes gear

automatically. You can influence the choice of gear within
certain limits by moving the Opticruise lever towards or away
from you.
You can influence the behaviour of automatic gear changing by
choosing a performance mode.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to change down when more power is needed.

Depress the accelerator pedal completely to activate Kickdown.
It is not possible to use Kickdown in economy mode.
Complete
20170627 244
The vehicle can be set so that Kickdown is deactivated. Contact

a Scania workshop to activate Kickdown.
Manual gear changing
In manual mode M you select the gear manually but Opticruise

changes gear, provided the selection is reasonable in relation to
the speed.
Opticruise will change the same number of gears up or down as
the number of times you move the Opticruise lever towards or
away from you. Opticruise can skip gears.
Performance modes
There are 4 performance modes in total and a vehicle can be set
to have 1, 2 or 3 performance modes.
The vehicle can be set so that one or more performance modes
cannot be selected. Contact a Scania workshop to change
performance mode availability.
Press on quick choice to select a performance mode. The active
performance mode is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Standard mode
b363535
In standard performance mode the vehicle is adapted for driving

to suit most situations.
245 Complete
20170627
Power mode b363534
In power mode, traction and acceleration performance are

prioritised over fuel consumption. Power mode is adapted for
driving on roads with many hills. When power mode is active,
the background lighting in the instrument cluster is blue.
When power mode is combined with automatic gear changing,
A, gear changing takes less time and takes place at higher engine
speeds. This improves the pulling power. Changing down will
take place earlier than in standard mode as well.
Economy mode
b363533
In economy mode, low fuel consumption and driver comfort are

prioritised above acceleration and vehicle performance.
Economy mode is adapted for long distance haulage and for
driving in light traffic at a steady speed. When economy mode is
active, the background lighting in the instrument cluster is
green.
A speed limitation may be added in this mode. It is not possible
to use Kickdown.
Complete
20170627 246
Off-road mode b363532
In off-road mode, the vehicle is adapted for driving on hilly roads

with poor surfaces. Quick gear changing and closed powertrain
are prioritised. When off-road mode is active, the background
lighting in the instrument cluster is brown.
Manoeuvring mode m
Manoeuvring mode is used, e.g. for shunting, precision driving
and when coupling a trailer. When manoeuvring mode is
activated, m appears in the instrument cluster. The manoeuvring
mode is automatically deactivated in high range.
To activate the manoeuvring mode, press down and hold the
Opticruise lever until m is displayed for the selected gear in the
instrument cluster.
To deactivate the manoeuvring mode, press the Opticruise lever
upwards once, m goes out in the instrument cluster.
Behaviour when manoeuvring mode is active:
• Accelerator pedal behaviour is adapted for precision

driving.
• The clutch opens automatically when the engine speed

approaches idling speed.
247 Complete
20170627
• When changing between reverse gear and forward gear,

the vehicle remembers the latest forward gear engaged
rather than the set starting gear, provided that the
forward gear is lower than the set or automatic starting
gear.
Limp home mode L
IMPORTANT!
Check that there is enough clutch fluid before
driving in limp home mode. The clutch must be
operable. Otherwise the powertrain could be
exposed to further damage.
Limp home mode is used to move the vehicle short distances.

Limp home mode must only be used if both manual and
automatic gear changing are not operational.
Activating limp home mode

2. Turn the key to the lock position.
3. Make sure that the drive mode selector on the

Opticruise lever is in neutral position.
4. Release the parking brake.
Complete
20170627 248
5. Move the Opticruise lever away from you and keep it in

that position.
6. Turn the key to the drive position and wait until you
hear a buzzer.
7. Release the Opticruise lever.
8. Move the Opticruise lever immediately away from you

again.
9. When limp home mode is activated, NL appears in the

instrument cluster. Limp home mode is active until the
key is turned to the locked position.
! WARNING!
Release the Opticruise lever and move it away

from you as soon as the buzzer tone is heard,
otherwise the limp home mode will not be
activated. Limp home mode is active until the
Driving in limp home mode

1. Turn the drive mode selector on the Opticruise lever to
drive position. The lowest possible starting gear is
selected automatically.
249 Complete
20170627
2. Select manual gear changing, M.
3. Keep your foot lightly on the accelerator pedal and turn

the key to the start position. The vehicle starts moving
forward with the help of the starter motor and the
engine starts.
4. Change up to a suitable gear.
5. To deactivate limp home mode, turn the key to the

locked position.
! WARNING!
Be prepared to turn the key to the locked

position when you stop. There is a risk that you
will not be able to engage neutral when driving in
the limp home mode. If that occurs, the vehicle
will continue forwards as long as the engine is
running.
Limited performance C
Limited performance, C, cannot be manually selected via the
Opticruise lever, instead it is activated at certain Opticruise
faults. When the mode is active, gear changes are carried out
more slowly.
Complete
20170627 250
For more information on measures when limited performance is

active, refer to the section Opticruise faults.
Setting the starting gear
Note:
When vehicles are heavily laden, 1st or 2nd gear
must be used as the starting gear. Otherwise the
clutch will be exposed to excessive wear.
Depending on the vehicle configuration the selection

possibilities for the starting gear may differ.
Proceed as follows to set the starting gear:

2. Select the starting gear in the instrument cluster.

Navigate in the menu Settings – Vehicle – Starting gear
and select gear.
If you want to start in another gear than that set, engage the
desired gear and then start the vehicle. The setting is not saved.
Contact a Scania workshop to change starting gear availability.
251 Complete
20170627
Automatic starting gear

With automatic starting gear, the vehicle selects the starting gear
according to factors such as road gradient and total vehicle
weight.
If you want to start in another gear than automatic, engage the
Crawl gear
There are 2 crawl gears, low crawl CL and high crawl CH. Note
that m for manoeuvring mode will not be shown in the
instrument cluster if a crawl gear is engaged.
IMPORTANT!
Avoid selecting a crawl gear while the vehicle is in
motion. This can cause a scraping noise in the
gearbox and at worst damage to the gearbox. The
reason for this is that the crawl gears have no
synchromesh and are extremely low.
Proceed as follows to engage a crawl gear:

2. Push the Opticruise lever away from you until the

desired crawl gear is displayed in the instrument cluster.
When a crawl gear is engaged, you can change up both with

automatic gear changing (A) and manual gear changing (M).
Complete
20170627 252
Opticruise faults
Symbol displayed in the instrument cluster if a fault

b374155
occurs in the gear change system.
Proceed as follows to try to reset Opticruise:

2. Turn the key to the lock position and wait for a few
seconds so that the vehicle is switched off completely.
If neither manual nor automatic gear changing is operable, you

can activate the limp home mode to move the vehicle. For more
information, refer to Limp home mode in the section Opticruise.
Contact a Scania workshop if the fault persists.
Opticruise
Opticruise is a system which allows a manual gearbox to change
gear automatically.
The vehicle may be equipped with a low cruising speed function.
Low cruising speed means that the vehicle calculates when it is
possible to save fuel by reducing the engine speed more than
normal at low loads. Low cruising speed is only engaged if you
drive with Opticruise in automatic mode.
253 Complete
20170627
1. Drive mode selector. The drive

1 2 mode selector must be moved
towards the steering wheel before
you can turn it to the R position.
2. Move the Opticruise lever towards
you to step up ( + ) or away from
you to step down ( - ).
3
3. Select between automatic A or
b363530
manual M gear changing.
The Opticruise lever can appear differently depending on the

vehicle’s configuration.

for Opticruise.
1. Current gear
2. Drive position
3
2
b363536
3. Next gear

for Opticruise.
Complete
20170627 254
1. Current gear
1 2
2. Drive position
3
b363949
3. Next gear
Starting the vehicle
Proceed as follows to start the vehicle:

2. Turn the key to the start position.

drive position; D.
4. Accelerate and drive off.
The vehicle will only start with the drive mode selector in neutral
position.
Parking
Proceed as follows to park:

255 Complete
20170627
Note:
If the drive mode selector is not in neutral
position when the key is turned to the lock
position, the system puts the gearbox into neutral
position. However, the drive mode selector on
the Opticruise lever remains in the position you
left it.
Driving modes
Drive position
Turn the drive mode selector on the Opticruise lever to drive

position D.
The behaviour in drive mode is dependent on if you have
selected automatic or manual changing. Do not leave the vehicle
stationary in drive mode, D.
Neutral position

position, N.
When you set the drive mode selector to the neutral position, N
you can, on gearboxes equipped with a splitter gear, select high
split (+) or low split (-).
Complete
20170627 256
Reverse mode

position, R. You can select R while driving, but reverse gear will
not be engaged until the vehicle has stopped.
On gearboxes with a splitter gear, you can choose between low
reverse (R1) and high reverse (R2). To select low reverse, move
the Opticruise lever away from you. To select high reverse, move
the Opticruise lever towards you. You can switch between low
reverse and high reverse when the vehicle is moving. Opticruise
automatically selects the reverse gear you last used the next time
you select reverse, R.
Gear changing positions

Switch between automatic and manual gear changing by pressing
the A/M button on the Opticruise lever. In the standard and
economy performance modes, manual gear changing can be
blocked at speeds above 50 km/h.
The clutch pedal only needs to be used when required. To
assume manual control of the clutch with the clutch pedal, press
it down completely. The control is maintained until the clutch
pedal is released completely.
Automatic gear changing
In automatic gear change mode, A Opticruise changes gear

automatically. You can influence the choice of gear within
certain limits by moving the Opticruise lever towards or away
from you.
257 Complete
20170627
You can influence the behaviour of automatic gear changing by

choosing a performance mode.
If you have taken manual control of the clutch with the clutch
pedal and slip the clutch, Opticruise is allowed to change gear.
The control is then handed back to you.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to change down when more power is needed.
Depress the accelerator pedal completely to activate Kickdown.
It is not possible to use Kickdown in economy mode.
The vehicle can be set so that Kickdown is deactivated. Contact
a Scania workshop to activate Kickdown.
Manual gear changing
In manual mode M you select the gear manually but Opticruise

changes gear, provided the selection is reasonable in relation to
the speed.
Opticruise will change the same number of gears up or down as
the number of times you move the Opticruise lever towards or
away from you. Opticruise can skip gears.
If you have taken manual control of the clutch with the clutch
pedal and slip the clutch, Opticruise is not allowed to change
gear until the clutch pedal is completely depressed or released.
Complete
20170627 258
Performance modes
There are 4 performance modes in total and a vehicle can be set
to have 1, 2 or 3 performance modes.
The vehicle can be set so that one or more performance modes
cannot be selected. Contact a Scania workshop to change
performance mode availability.
Press on quick choice to select a performance mode. The active
performance mode is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Standard mode
b363535
In standard performance mode the vehicle is adapted for driving

to suit most situations.
Power mode
b363534
In power mode, traction and acceleration performance are

prioritised over fuel consumption. Power mode is adapted for
driving on roads with many hills. When power mode is active,
the background lighting in the instrument cluster is blue.
When power mode is combined with automatic gear changing,
A, gear changing takes less time and takes place at higher engine
259 Complete
20170627
speeds. This improves the pulling power. Changing down will

take place earlier than in standard mode as well.
Economy mode
b363533
In economy mode, low fuel consumption and driver comfort are

prioritised above acceleration and vehicle performance.
Economy mode is adapted for long distance haulage and for
driving in light traffic at a steady speed. When economy mode is
active, the background lighting in the instrument cluster is
green.
A speed limitation may be added in this mode. It is not possible
to use Kickdown.
Off-road mode
b363532
In off-road mode, the vehicle is adapted for driving on hilly roads

with poor surfaces. Quick gear changing and closed powertrain
are prioritised. When off-road mode is active, the background
lighting in the instrument cluster is brown.
Complete
20170627 260
Manoeuvring mode m
Manoeuvring mode is used, e.g. for shunting, precision driving
and when coupling a trailer. When manoeuvring mode is
activated, m appears in the instrument cluster. The manoeuvring
mode is automatically deactivated in high range.
To activate the manoeuvring mode, press down and hold the
Opticruise lever until m is displayed for the selected gear in the
instrument cluster.
To deactivate the manoeuvring mode, press the Opticruise lever
upwards once, m goes out in the instrument cluster.
Behaviour when manoeuvring mode is active:
• Accelerator pedal behaviour is adapted for precision

driving.
• The clutch opens automatically when the engine speed

approaches idling speed.
• When changing between reverse gear and forward gear,

the vehicle remembers the latest forward gear engaged
rather than the set starting gear, provided that the
forward gear is lower than the set or automatic starting
gear.
Limp home mode L

Limp home mode is used to move the vehicle short distances.
Limp home mode must only be used if both manual and
261 Complete
20170627
automatic gear changing are not operational. When the limp

home mode is activated, Opticruise will disregard the clutch
pedal.
Activating limp home mode

2. Turn the key to the lock position.
3. Make sure that the drive mode selector on the

Opticruise lever is in neutral position.
5. Move the Opticruise lever away from you and keep it in

that position.
6. Turn the key to the drive position and wait until you
hear a buzzer.
7. Release the Opticruise lever.
8. Move the Opticruise lever immediately away from you

again.
9. When limp home mode is activated, NL appears in the

instrument cluster. Limp home mode is active until the
Complete
20170627 262
! WARNING!
Release the Opticruise lever and move it away

from you as soon as the buzzer tone is heard,
otherwise the limp home mode will not be
activated. Limp home mode is active until the
Driving in limp home mode

1. Turn the drive mode selector on the Opticruise lever to
drive position. The lowest possible starting gear is
selected automatically.
2. Select manual gear changing, M.
IMPORTANT!
Do not engage a too low gear while driving. This
can result in engine overspeed.
3. Keep your foot lightly on the accelerator pedal and turn

the key to the start position. The vehicle starts moving
forward with the help of the starter motor and the
engine starts.
4. To deactivate limp home mode, turn the key to the

locked position.
263 Complete
20170627
! WARNING!
Be prepared to turn the key to the locked

position when you stop. There is a risk that you
will not be able to engage neutral when driving in
the limp home mode. If that occurs, the vehicle
will continue forwards as long as the engine is
running.
Limited performance C
Limited performance, C, cannot be manually selected via the
Opticruise lever, instead it is activated at certain Opticruise
faults. When the mode is active, gear changes are carried out
more slowly.
For more information on measures when limited performance is
active, refer to the section Opticruise faults.
Setting the starting gear
Note:
When vehicles are heavily laden, 1st or 2nd gear
must be used as the starting gear. Otherwise the
clutch will be exposed to excessive wear.
Complete
20170627 264
Depending on the vehicle configuration the selection

possibilities for the starting gear may differ.
Proceed as follows to set the starting gear:

2. Select the starting gear in the instrument cluster.

Navigate in the menu Settings – Vehicle – Starting gear
and select gear.
If you want to start in another gear than that set, engage the
Contact a Scania workshop to change starting gear availability.
Automatic starting gear

With automatic starting gear, the vehicle selects the starting gear
according to factors such as road gradient and total vehicle
weight.
If you want to start in another gear than automatic, engage the
Crawl gear
There are 2 crawl gears, low crawl CL and high crawl CH. Note
that m for manoeuvring mode will not be shown in the
instrument cluster if a crawl gear is engaged.
265 Complete
20170627
IMPORTANT!
Avoid selecting a crawl gear while the vehicle is in
motion. This can cause a scraping noise in the
gearbox and at worst damage to the gearbox. The
reason for this is that the crawl gears have no
synchromesh and are extremely low.
Proceed as follows to engage a crawl gear:

2. Push the Opticruise lever away from you until the

desired crawl gear is displayed in the instrument cluster.
If the clutch was released when the gearbox was in
neutral, crawl gear is engaged after an intentional delay.
Opticruise faults
Symbol displayed in the instrument cluster if a fault

b374155
occurs in the gear change system.
If the clutch pedal is used when a fault occurs you will be

prompted to engage neutral, N. When neutral position is
engaged, the 2-pedal mode will be activated. Opticruise will then
disregard the clutch pedal.
Complete
20170627 266
If the clutch pedal is not used when a fault occurs, the 2-pedal
mode will be activated. Opticruise will then disregard the clutch
pedal.
Note:
If you are requested to engage neutral position,
the driving is not connected until neutral is
engaged. When the driving is not engaged, the
vehicle cannot be driven away and there is a risk
of the vehicle rolling away if it is on an incline.
In both cases, a symbol and a message are displayed in the

instrument cluster.
Symbol that is displayed for a fault in the clutch

b377573
system.
Proceed as follows to restore Opticruise:

2. Turn the key to the lock position and wait for a few
seconds so that the vehicle is switched off completely.
If neither manual nor automatic gear changing is operable, you

can activate the limp home mode to move the vehicle. For more
information, refer to Limp home mode in the section Opticruise.
267 Complete
20170627
Exhaust brake
! WARNING!
Use the exhaust brake with care on slippery roads

or with light loads.
The exhaust brake is an auxiliary brake and brakes the driving

wheels. The exhaust brake is most effective at high engine speeds
and low gears.
In order to check the engine and emissions, the engine
management system may sometimes use a moderate amount of
exhaust brake, even when all auxiliary brakes are off.
If the vehicle continues to accelerate at maximum exhaust
braking with downhill speed control, Opticruise with change
down.
Automatic exhaust brake
The exhaust brake is integrated

b364518
into the auxiliary brake lever.
Complete
20170627 268
Activate the automatic exhaust brake using the slide control on

the auxiliary brake lever.

b381015


b364517

269 Complete
20170627

b381014

b364521
Switch for activating the exhaust brake.
Press the switch to activate the automatic exhaust brake.

When the automatic exhaust brake is activated and you depress
the brake pedal, the exhaust brake and wheel brakes work
together to achieve the best braking effect possible.
The exhaust brake can also be activated by the downhill speed

control to increase the brake effect.
Manual exhaust brake

b364519
Complete
20170627 270
b364520
The auxiliary brake lever has 3 positions. When you move the
auxiliary brake lever downwards, the braking effect gradually
increases.
Move the auxiliary brake lever up to position 1 when you have

finished braking. Otherwise the auxiliary brake will brake again
as soon as you stop accelerating.
increases.

When the ABS is working actively, the exhaust brake is

automatically disengaged. The exhaust brake is engaged again as
soon as the braking system permits. For more information on
ABS, refer to the ABS section.
When the EBS is working actively, the exhaust brake is
automatically disengaged. The exhaust brake is engaged again as
soon as the braking system permits. For more information on
EBS, refer to the section EBS.
271 Complete
20170627
Retarder
! WARNING!
Do not use retarder on slippery road surfaces.

There is a risk of the wheels locking.
The retarder is an auxiliary brake and brakes the driving wheels.

Use the retarder for long brake applications For the retarder to
work as efficiently as possible the engine speed must exceed
1,800 rpm.
Symbol Explanation
The symbol is lights up green in the

instrument cluster when the retarder is
b200303
active.
If the symbol lights up yellow in the

instrument cluster if there is a fault that
b200357
prevents the retarder from braking.

Contact a Scania workshop.
Complete
20170627 272
Automatic retarder
The retarder is integrated into the

b362685
auxiliary brake lever.
Activate the automatic retarder using the slide control on the


b362684
Activate the automatic retarder using the slide control on the

273 Complete
20170627
b362683
Switch for activating the automatic retarder.
Press the switch to activate the automatic retarder.
Manual retarder

b364519

b364520
increases.

Complete
20170627 274
When the ABS is working actively, the retarder is automatically

disengaged. The retarder is engaged again as soon as the braking
system permits. For more information, refer to the section ABS.
When the EBS is working actively, the retarder is automatically
disengaged. The retarder is engaged again as soon as the braking
system permits. For more information, refer to the section EBS.
Downhill speed control

Downhill speed control is designed for long periods of braking
on downhill slopes. When downhill speed control is operating,
the wheel brakes on the vehicle are completely passive and cool.
This enhances both safety and operating economy.
The ABS must work for the downhill speed control to work. You
can, however, still activate the retarder.
b358728
Switch for downhill speed control
1. Press + or - to change the set speed at which the vehicle

will begin to brake.
2. Press 0 to disengage the downhill speed control. Press

the arrow to activate the downhill speed control at the
previously set speed.
275 Complete
20170627
Some vehicles can be programmed so that you can always use the
exhaust brake during cruise control. The exhaust brake is used
by downhill speed control as an additional help to maintain
speed.
Otherwise the exhaust brake switch must be on in order to
activate the exhaust brake.
The vehicle can be programmed to work in one of the following
ways:
• Either only with the downhill speed control button
• Or with both the downhill speed control button and the

brake pedal.
The option of activating downhill speed control can be disabled

in the workshop.
On some vehicles there is a programming option which ensures
that the brake lamps do not come on during downhill speed
control.
Using downhill speed control
Engage downhill speed control by:

1. Set the AUT button in position 1 on the retarder.
2. Apply the brakes on the vehicle until you reach desired

speed or press the plus or minus part of the downhill
speed control button. Downhill speed control is
activated.
Complete
20170627 276
3. Change gears so that the engine speed is over 1,800 rpm

to obtain best braking effect.
The engine speed is automatically regulated if you drive with

Opticruise.
Your vehicle will maintain the current speed until you accelerate
and have fully released the clutch or begin to brake again.
If it is not possible to maintain speed when going downhill, it is
likely that the engine speed is too low. If so, change down and
restart the downhill speed control. If it is still not possible to
maintain speed when going downhill, you must reduce the speed.
Downhill speed control with offset

Some vehicles have a function, brake offset, which you can use to
set a difference in speed between the downhill speed control and
cruise control.
To use the function, the retarder must be in position AUT 1.
The display shows the set speed

b361240
when the vehicle starts braking.
Setting brake offset

When you come to a downhill slope and wish to set the brake
offset, press the plus or minus part of the downhill speed control
button. The brake offset speed is set each time the button is
pressed. If you hold down the plus or minus part, this is similar
to pressing the button several times in succession.
277 Complete
20170627
When you press the plus or minus part, the display in the
instrument cluster lights up for a few seconds and you can see the
speed at which the vehicle will begin to brake.
Brake offset can only be activated when cruise control is engaged.
Disengaging brake offset

You can disengage brake offset at any time by pressing the OFF
part of the downhill speed control switch.
If you press the OFF part of the cruise control switch on the
steering wheel, both brake offset and cruise control will be
switched off.
If you depress the clutch pedal, cruise control will be disengaged.
Downhill speed control will still be active, however.
Fuel-saving measure
You can save fuel by temporarily disengaging downhill speed
control at the end of a downhill slope. This gives the vehicle a
little extra speed into the coming uphill slope.
Proceed as follows to temporarily disengage downhill speed

control:
• Press the accelerator pedal at the end of the downhill

slope when the retarder is working. Downhill speed
control is temporarily disengaged.
Complete
20170627 278
• Downhill speed control is automatically activated during

the next uphill slope when the cruise control starts
working. Downhill speed control is now ready to brake
during the next downhill slope.
• Press on the RES part of the downhill speed control

button if you change your mind and want to activate the
downhill speed control immediately.
Parking brake
The parking brake lever is located on the instrument panel.
! WARNING!
Always apply the parking brake before leaving

the driver area.
The parking brake has the following positions:
1. Drive position
2. Emergency brake position
b211736
3. Parking brake position
279 Complete
20170627
Drive position
When the lever is in the foremost position 1, the parking brake
is released as long as there is enough operating pressure in the
system.
Emergency brake position

By moving the lever from the foremost position 1 to the pressure
point 2, the tractor parking brake and trailer service brake are
gradually applied. This can be used when emergency braking a
tractor and trailer. The parking brake lamp is lit as long as the
brake is applied.
Parking brake position

Pull the lever past pressure point 2 to position 3. The tractor unit
parking brake will then be applied and the trailer brakes will be
released.
Note:
Check that the parking brake is locked into
position 3 by pressing in on it. The lever springs
out 2-3 mm when you release it.
Complete
20170627 280
! WARNING!
Check that the vehicle combination does not

move when parking on a slope. Connect the
trailer parking brake and chock the wheels if
necessary.
Release the parking brake by pulling the lever towards you and
pushing it back over pressure point 2.
The parking brake has the following positions:
1. Drive position
2. Emergency brake position
3. Parking brake position
b211737
4. Test position
Drive position
When the lever is in the foremost position 1, the parking brake
is released as long as there is enough operating pressure in the
system.
281 Complete
20170627
Emergency brake position

By moving the lever from the foremost position 1 to the pressure
point 2, the tractor parking brake and trailer service brake are
gradually applied. This can be used when emergency braking a
tractor and trailer. The parking brake lamp is lit as long as the
brake is applied.
Parking brake position

Pull the lever past pressure point 2 to position 3. The tractor unit
parking brake will then be applied and the trailer brakes will be
applied.
Note:
Check that the parking brake is locked into
position 3 by pressing in on it. The lever springs
out 2-3 mm when you release it.
! WARNING!
Check that the vehicle combination does not

move when parking on a slope. Connect the
trailer parking brake and chock the wheels if
necessary.
Complete
20170627 282
Release the parking brake by pulling the lever towards you and
pushing it back over pressure point 2.
Test position
Release the trailer brakes by pulling the lever to position 4.
Check that the vehicle combination has not started moving and
then let the lever spring back to position 3. The tractor unit
parking brake is still applied.
Trailer brake
b358777
Trailer brake switch
The trailer brake brakes the trailer without braking the vehicle
itself. Press to activate the trailer brake. The diode in the switch
is lit when the function is active. The trailer brake cannot be
activated if the speed is higher than 4 km/h. The trailer brake is
automatically deactivated if the speed is greater than 7 km/h.
283 Complete
20170627
The trailer brake lever is located

b360742
on the instrument panel.
The trailer brake is applied gradually the more the lever is tilted.
! WARNING!
The trailer brake lever only actuates the brakes of

the trailer.
! WARNING!
Never use the trailer brake while parking.
! WARNING!
Remember that the wheels can lock during heavy

braking.
Complete
20170627 284
Interlock valve
If the pressure in the brake system drops below the interlock
valve setting value when the parking brake is applied, the
interlock valve is triggered. Then in order to release the parking
brake, press in the interlock valve. In order to release the parking
brake, a system pressure above the interlock valve setting value is
required.
Press the interlock valve to

PUSH TO SUPPLY supply air to the parking brake
circuit and allow the parking
b200950
brake to be released.
On vehicles equipped with a trailer brake the interlock valve has

a double function.
b203867
Proceed as follows:
1. Set the parking brake lever to the parking brake
position.
2. Pull out the interlock valve to fill the trailer’s brake

circuits with air. This can take a few minutes. At the
285 Complete
20170627
same time the brake circuits are filled with air, the
parking brakes are released and the service brake
applied.
3. Press in the interlock valve to engage the traile’s parking

brake and release the service brakes.
4. Move the parking brake lever to the drive position to

release the parking brakes for the entire vehicle.
Hill hold
b358725
Hill hold switch.
IMPORTANT!
Do not use hill hold in wintry road conditions
because of the risk that the vehicle will skid with
locked wheels.
Use hill hold to make hill starts easier.
Proceed as follows to use hill hold:

1. Switch on the power on the vehicle.
2. Press the switch, which lights when hill hold is activated.
3. When you depress the brake pedal a click sounds, after

which the brake pressure is retained so that you can
Complete
20170627 286
release the brake pedal. The harder the brake pedal is

applied, the harder hill hold is applied.
Hill hold is available until the function is switched off via the
switch. If the function was activated when the vehicle was shut
down, hill hold will be activated the next time the vehicle is
started.
Note:
Hill hold is not activated if the brake pressure is
too low or if ABS has been activated at the end of
braking.
! WARNING!

the driver area.
The brake pressure is retained until the vehicle is driven away or

the clutch is released completely with the gear in the neutral
position.
287 Complete
20170627
! WARNING!

the driver area.
Hill hold releases a few seconds after the pedals are completely
released. The vehicle can then start moving. A warning signal
and a warning text appears in the display before hill hold releases.
Hill hold releases immediately when you engage a gear, release

the brake and lightly depress the accelerator pedal.
Hill start assistance

b358725
Switch for hill start assistance.
IMPORTANT!
Do not use hill start assistance in wintry road
conditions because of the risk that the vehicle will
skid with locked wheels.
Use hill start assistance to make hill starts easier.
Proceed as follows to use the hill start assistance:

1. Switch on the power on the vehicle.
Complete
20170627 288
2. Press the switch, that lights when hill start assistance is

activated.
3. When you depress the brake pedal a click sounds, after

which the brake pressure is retained so that you can
release the brake pedal. The harder you depress the
brake pedal, the harder hill start assistance is applied.
The hill start assistance is available until you switch off the
function via the switch. If the function was activated when the
vehicle was shut down, hill start assistance will be activated the
next time the vehicle is started.
Note:
Hill start assistance is not activated if the brake
pressure is too low or if ABS has been activated at
the end of braking.
! WARNING!

the driver area.
Hill start assistance releases a few seconds after the brake pedal
is released. Hill start assistance releases without any warning.
289 Complete
20170627
Automatic neutral position

If the parking brake or service brake is applied when the hill hold
switch is active, the gearbox is automatically set to neutral. The
gear previously selected flashes in the instrument cluster.
When you release the brake, the gearbox returns to D. On some
vehicles, you may need to engage neutral position first and then
D before continuing.
If you change the position of the drive mode selector when
the function is active, automatic neutral position is disengaged.
Before you can continue, you must engage neutral position and
then D.
ABS
The vehicle is equipped with anti-lock brakes. Anti-lock brakes
reduce the braking distance and improve the steering.
The improved steering with ABS reduces the risk of jack-knifing
accidents.
This is how ABS works

If any wheel is beginning to lock up, the control unit decreases
the brake pressure to that wheel so that locking of the wheel
ceases. In this way very quick pump action braking is achieved.
• After the starter lock has been turned to the drive
position, the control unit carries out a self-test,
whereupon several clicking sounds are heard.
Complete
20170627 290
• The ABS symbol for the vehicle should go out after

approx. 3 seconds if the system is fault-free.
• If a fault occurs, all or part of the ABS system will be

disconnected. If the vehicle is equipped with an
automatic exhaust brake or foot-operated retarder, these
functions are always disconnected when the warning
lamp is illuminated.
• Depending on the type of trailer, the trailer ABS symbol

may remain on until the vehicle reaches a vehicle speed
above 10 km/h.
• After repair, the ABS symbol will only go out after the
system has received signals from the wheel speed
sensors. The vehicle must have attained a vehicle speed
of 5-7 km/h for this to occur.
The vehicle is equipped with a switch to change control of ABS.

The control is dependant on the vehicle’s speed.
0-15 km/h No control of ABS.
15-40 km/h Limited control of ABS.
>40 km/h Normal control of ABS.
Only use this function under controlled conditions. The

vehicle’s driving characteristics, such as braking distance and
291 Complete
20170627
steerability, are negatively affected during no or limited control

of ABS.
b353467
Switch which activates ABS off-road.
EBS
EBS is an electronic brake system, which means that the brakes
are applied more rapidly resulting in a shorter braking distance.
During normal braking, the EBS braking force is distributed
between the wheels so that the wear on the brake linings is
equalised. During heavy braking, the braking force is distributed
so that the vehicle’s stability remains as good as possible.
EBS includes, among other things, the functions ABS, ESP and
traction control (TC). For more information, refer to the
sections ABS, ESP and Traction Control (TC).
! WARNING!
EBS is affected by bodywork, conversions of the

steering or steering column and adjustments of
the control unit parameters.
Complete
20170627 292
If you depress the brake pedal when the vehicle’s power is

switched off, EBS is activated.
Brake adaptation
Regulating the power in the trailer connection provides
automatic brake adaptation between the tractor unit and trailer.
The trailer’s braking force is adjusted automatically during
driving.
Back-up
If there is a serious fault in the EBS, a red brake warning is
displayed in the instrument cluster. Then, a pneumatically
operated backup system is engaged automatically. When the
back-up system is engaged, the brake pressure to the wheel
brakes is no longer controlled by electronic signals but by
compressed air. The braking system still has the same braking
force but the brake pedal feels different and it requires
considerably more pedal force than normal to brake the vehicle.
! WARNING!
When the back-up system is engaged, all

electronic functions, e.g. ABS and TC and ESP,
are also disengaged.
293 Complete
20170627
Wear control
Wear control helps to distribute the braking power so that the
disc brakes are evenly worn.
You can check how much brake lining is left on each wheel in the
instrument cluster. Refer to the Instrument cluster section for
more information.
Emergency brake assist

EBS reinforces the brake pressure during emergency braking in
emergency situations.
Warning information
Symbols and fault messages for the EBS are displayed in the
instrument cluster. If there is a fault, fault codes may be
generated, which you can also read in the instrument cluster.
! WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle if the low brake pressure

warning lamp is flashing or if the brake pressure
gauges show that the pressure is too low. Contact
a Scania workshop if you cannot increase the
pressure so that the warnings go out.
Complete
20170627 294
Note:
A fault message is displayed for 5 seconds when
the trailer is connected. This does not mean that
there is a fault but is only a check to ensure that
the fault message works. If the fault message
disappears within a set time, the system is
working correctly. The fault message is only
displayed if the trailer is equipped with EBS.
Brake test
Carry out the brake test when there is a message in the
instrument cluster that requests this. Stop the vehicle and
acknowledge all warnings before you carry out the brake test.
Follow the instructions displayed in the instrument cluster in
order to carry out the brake test.
Proceed as follows to carry out the brake test:

2. Fully depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.
If the brake system is working correctly, the warning goes out. If

it does not go out or it comes on again, contact a Scania
workshop.
295 Complete
20170627
The test may fail due to:
• Incorrect pedal movement.
• Time expired
• The vehicle is in motion.
If the test failed, carry out the test again.
Complete
20170627 296
Lighting
Lighting
Standard lighting
1. Spotlamps in the front grille panel
1 2 3
2. Spotlamps on roof
3. Work light
6 4. Front foglight
4
5. Rear foglight
5 6. Headlamp levelling control
9
12 10 7. Rotary control for headlamps
8
11
8. Position 0
9. Position lamp position
7 10.Main and dipped beam position

11.Mode A
b357397
12.Light sensor
1. Hazard warning signal

2. Resetting the trip meter
2 3 4
3. Adjusting the instrument panel
lighting
4. Night lighting in the instrument
b358902
panel
297 Complete
20170627
Lighting
Daytime running light

The daytime running light is on when the engine is running and
the headlamp rotary control is in position 0 or in the A position.
When the daytime running light is on in the 0 position, the
background lighting in the instrument panel will switch off. If it
is difficult to see the switch symbols, there is also a risk that it is
too dark for your vehicle to be seen clearly.
Work light
The work light only works if the position light is on.
Note:
It is not permitted to drive on public roads with
the work light switched on.
Your vehicle is pre-programmed so that the work light is

automatically switched off if the vehicle speed exceeds 20 km/h.
You can activate the Work light function together with reversing
lights. This function automatically activates the work light when
reverse gear is engaged. The function is activated by holding
down the work light button for at least 3 seconds. When the
function is on, the work light button will flash when you engage
reverse gear. To deactivate the function, press the work light
button for at least 3 seconds.
Complete
20170627 298
Lighting
Foglight
The front foglamps work in combination with the position lamps
or main and dipped beams. The use of foglight in combination
with dipped beam is forbidden on certain markets.
The rear foglight can only be on when the front foglight or
dipped beam is on.
Spotlamps
The spotlamps work in combination with the main beam.
Spotlamps on the roof and spotlamps in the front grille panel
cannot be on at the same time.
Cornering light
The cornering light comes on when you switch on the direction
indicators or turn the steering wheel considerably.
The cornering light cannot be used in combination with
foglights.
External convenience lighting from a parked

vehicle
You can allow the position lamps or dipped beam to remain
active for a short period after the vehicle has been parked. The
function can be activated within 10 seconds of switching off the
engine and turning the starter key to the locking position or
radio position.
299 Complete
20170627
Lighting
Lever position Lighting
Right-hand direction Dipped beam

indicator
Left-hand direction indicator Position lamps
Main beam flasher Dipped beam and position

light
The external convenience lighting is on for 45 seconds after

activation. The external convenience lighting then goes out
automatically. You can switch off the external convenience
lighting by moving the lever again within the 45 seconds that the
external convenience lighting is on.
Other lighting
Any exterior storage boxes are equipped with lamps that come on
when the boxes are opened and go out when the doors are closed.
Storage compartments with hatches in the roofshelf are also
equipped with lamps that come on when the hatches are opened
and go out when closed. The lamps in open storage
compartments in the roofshelf come on when the general
lighting is turned on.
Using the remote control for central locking and alarm, you can
check all the vehicle’s lamps and switch on the safety light. For
Complete
20170627 300
Lighting
more information, see the Central locking section or Central

locking and alarm, depending on the vehicle’s specification.
Lighting in the cab

The general lighting in the cab comes on automatically when the
vehicle is unlocked using the remote control or when the doors
are opened. A delay function keeps the general lighting on for a
while longer after the doors have been closed. The general
lighting also comes on for a time when the starter key is removed
from the starter lock.
The lighting in the cab can be set manually using the switches.
The vehicle saves the settings and uses them until they are
changed.
Note:
If the lighting in the cab is on despite the vehicle
being shut down, the lighting is switched off after
a delay so as not to drain the vehicle battery. This
only occurs if the vehicle does not detect driver
activity, e.g. button presses or opened doors.
1 2 3
1. General lighting
2. Reading lamp, driver
b371126
3. Ceiling lighting
301 Complete
20170627
Lighting
General lighting
b359328
• Position 0 deactivates all general lighting. The lighting is

off even if the doors are open. All internal lighting and
lighting in storage boxes is switched off and cannot be
switched on using other switches.
• The middle position of the switch activates the automatic

mode of the interior lighting. It is possible to manually
activate and adjust all interior lighting. The lighting is
switched off automatically when the vehicle doors are
locked on the outside with the remote control or the
key.
• Maximum brightness is activated via the lower, spring-

loaded button of the switch. One press on the switch
activates maximum roof lighting brightness. It is
possible to manually deactivate and adjust all interior
lighting. A further press of the switch returns the
lighting to its previous position.
Complete
20170627 302
Lighting
Reading lamp, driver

b359324
Ceiling lighting
b359327
Press the switch in the middle to switch the ceiling lighting on or

off. The up arrow or the down arrow is used to dim the lighting
until the desired brightness has been attained.
changed.
303 Complete
20170627
Lighting
Note:
1. General lighting
1 2 3 4
3. Ceiling lighting
4. Background lighting under
b371125
instrument panel
General lighting
b359328

Complete
20170627 304
Lighting

key.

Ceiling lighting
b359327

305 Complete
20170627
Lighting
Background lighting under instrument panel

b359326
The background lighting under the instrument panel consists of

a soft red light and can be used when driving at night, for
example.
Press the switch in the middle to switch the background lighting
under the instrument panel on or off. The up arrow or the down
arrow is used to dim the lighting until the desired brightness has
been attained.
changed.
Complete
20170627 306
Lighting
Note:
1. General lighting
1 2 3 4 5
3. Ceiling lighting
instrument panel
b371124
5. Background lighting in ceiling
General lighting
b359328

307 Complete
20170627
Lighting

key.

Reading lamp, driver

b359324
Ceiling lighting
b359327
Complete
20170627 308
Lighting

Background lighting under instrument panel

b359326
The background lighting under the instrument panel consists of

a soft red light and can be used when driving at night, for
example.
under the instrument panel on or off. The up arrow or the down
arrow is used to dim the lighting until the desired brightness has
been attained.
Background lighting in ceiling

b359325
309 Complete
20170627
Lighting
The background lighting in the ceiling consists of a soft red light

and can be used when sleeping overnight in the cab, for example.
in the ceiling on or off. The up arrow or the down arrow is used
to dim the lighting until the desired brightness has been attained.
Switch in the passenger door

b358185
Ceiling lighting
b359368
Reading lamp, passenger
Switch by the bed
1. Ceiling lighting
b371690
2 2. Lighting off
Lighting off
Press the lighting switch to switch off all lighting in the vehicle,
apart from the reading lamp and lighting in storage boxes.
Complete
20170627 310
Lighting
Switch by the bed
1 2
1. Ceiling lighting
instrument panel
3. Lighting off
b371691
3 4 4. Night lighting
Lighting off
Night lighting
The night lighting makes it easier to enter and exit the vehicle or
move around the cab at night without drawing attention to the
vehicle. When night lighting is activated, the general lighting
does not come on automatically when, for example, the doors are
opened. Night lighting is deactivated by pressing the switch in
again or by locking the door with a key or remote control.
311 Complete
20170627
Lighting
Switch by the bed
1. Ceiling lighting
1 2 3
instrument panel
3. Background lighting in ceiling
4. Lighting off
b370993
4 5 5. Night lighting
Lighting off
Night lighting
The lighting makes it easier to enter and exit the vehicle or move
around the cab at night without drawing attention to the vehicle.
When night lighting is activated, the general lighting does not
come on automatically when, for example, the doors are opened.
Night lighting is deactivated by pressing the switch in again or
by locking the door with a key or remote control.
Complete
20170627 312
Lighting
General lightingb360573
• Position 0: all lighting is off. The lighting is off even if

the doors are open. All internal lighting and lighting in
storage boxes is switched off and cannot be switched on
using other switches.
• Middle position: The general lighting comes on when the

doors are opened and goes off when they are closed.
• Lower position: The general lighting is on.
IMPORTANT!
Switch off all lighting in the cab with the switch
when using long-term parking.
313 Complete
20170627
Lighting
Ceiling lightingb360572
Press the switch to switch the ceiling lighting on or off.
Reading lamp
b360571
Press the switch to switch the reading lamp on or off.
Rotating beacon
b371929
The LED indicates when the rotating beacon is activated.
Complete
20170627 314
Locks and alarm
Locks and alarm

Central locking
b364488
Switch in door for central locking
1 2
1. Turn on the safety light.

3
2. Lock the doors.
3. Test external lighting. All lamps
come on in sequence.
4
b362744
4. Unlock the doors.
Unlock the central locking in one of the following ways:
• Press the unlock button in the central locking switch in

the door.
• Turn the starter key in the door lock to unlock the door
where the lock is fitted.
• Separate unlocking: Press the remote control’s unlock

button once to unlock the driver’s door. Press twice to
unlock both doors.
315 Complete
20170627
Locks and alarm
• Simultaneous unlocking: Press the remote control’s

unlock button once to unlock both doors.
Lock the central locking in one of the following ways:
• Press the lock button in the central locking switch in the

door to lock all doors.
• Turn the starter key in the door lock to lock the door
• Press the remote control’s lock button once to lock all

doors.
• If all doors and hatches are properly closed, the direction

indicators will flash twice and the LED in the door will
start to flash if the power is on. If the voltage is switched
off, the LED flashes 5 times.
• If a door is not properly closed, the direction indicators

will flash rapidly 4 times.
Note:
The doors must be completely closed for them to
lock.
The central locking does not work if the power is
disconnected by the battery master switch.
Complete
20170627 316
Locks and alarm
Automatic relocking
If you unlock the vehicle using the remote control, the vehicle
will automatically be relocked after a set time if you do not open
a door and the starter key is not in the start position.
Lock settings
Lock settings are made in the instrument cluster. Use the OK
button to navigate the display menu. You can find the selections
under Settings. For more information, refer to the Menus in
Display section.
Security central locking

The vehicle is equipped with security central locking, which
prevent unauthorised individuals from opening the vehicle’s
doors during brief stops or at low speed.
Security central locking automatically locks the vehicle doors
when you start driving. You can activate or deactivate the
function in the instrument cluster. The options are found under
section.
Security central locking can be permanently deactivated or
activated by a Scania workshop. Contact a Scania workshop for
more information.
317 Complete
20170627
Locks and alarm
Safety lighting and testing external lighting

With safety lighting it is safer to approach the vehicle when there
are no other light sources near the vehicle. The position lamps
and direction indicators come on with safety lighting.
Safety lighting and the test of external lighting is automatically
switched off:
• after 1 minute.
• if the relevant button is pressed again
• when the starter key is moved to the drive position
• when the vehicle is driven off.
The battery is located on the back of the remote control. Open

the cover by inserting a screwdriver in the hole at the Scania
logotype and carefully prising open. The battery is a lithium
battery, 3V CR 2430.
Deregistering and registering the remote control
If you have lost a remote control and require it to be blocked, a

Scania workshop can carry this out. Bring along the PIN code,
which is common to the remote control and immobiliser. The
PIN code is kept by the vehicle owner. The vehicle owner can
enlist the help of a Scania workshop if the PIN code has been
misplaced.
Complete
20170627 318
Locks and alarm
Bring the PIN code for workshop visits

Bring the alarm PIN code if you want a Scania workshop to
reprogram, upgrade or add new functions to the alarm. The code
is also needed to renew the remote control and for the workshop
to program additional remote controls for the vehicle.
Locking the vehicle with the starter key in

the drive position
The vehicle is programmed so that you can lock it with the
starter key in the drive position, e.g. when you are using the tail
lift.
Proceed as follows:
1. Leave the starter key in the drive position. Apply the
parking brake.
2. Lock the vehicle by pressing the remote control lock

button.
Central locking and alarm
The sticker indicates that the vehicle is equipped with

b204384
an alarm.
319 Complete
20170627
Locks and alarm
Locking doors and activating the alarm

b364488
Switch in door for central locking.
1. Turn on the safety light.

1 2
2. Lock doors and activate the alarm.
3. Test external lighting.
6 4. Lock the doors and activate the

alarm without activating the cab’s
3 motion detector and vehicle’s
inclination detector.
4 5. Unlock doors and deactivate the
alarm.
5
6. Lock the doors and activate the
alarm without activating the cab’s
b362745
motion detector.
Locking doors and activating the alarm:
• Press any of the lock buttons on the remote control to

lock the doors and activate the alarm.
• If all doors and hatches are properly closed, the direction

indicators will flash 2 times and the LED in the door
will start to flash if the power in the starter lock drive
position is on. If the voltage is switched off, the LED
flashes 5 times.
Complete
20170627 320
Locks and alarm
• If a door is not properly closed, the direction indicators

will flash rapidly 4 times.
• For other faults, e.g. if a hatch is not closed properly, the

LED in the door flashes. The lamps for the direction
indicators flash 2 times and then rapidly 4 times.
Unlocking doors and deactivating the alarm:
• Press the remote control unlocking button to deactivate

the alarm. The direction indicators flash once. If the
alarm has been triggered, switch off the alarm using the
remote control unlocking button.
• Separate unlocking: Press the remote control unlocking

button once to deactivate the alarm and unlock the
driver’s door. Press twice to unlock both doors.
• Simultaneous unlocking: Press the remote control

unlocking button once to deactivate the alarm and
unlock both doors.
If a door is not fully closed when you lock the vehicle, the door
remains unlocked. But the alarm is activated even if all the doors
and hatches are not closed properly.
Locking doors without activating the alarm.
• Press the lock button in the central locking switch in the

door to lock all doors.
• Turn the starter key in the door lock to lock the door
321 Complete
20170627
Locks and alarm
Unlocking doors without deactivating the alarm:
• Press the unlock button in the central locking switch in

the door.
• Turn the starter key in the door lock to unlock the door
Note:
The doors must be completely closed for them to
lock.
The central locking does not work if the voltage
is disconnected by the battery master switch.
Automatic relocking
If you unlock the vehicle using the remote control, the vehicle
will automatically be relocked after a set time if you do not open
a door and the starter key is not in the start position.
Lock settings
Lock settings are made in the instrument cluster. Use the OK
button to navigate the display menu. You can find the selections
under Settings. For more information, refer to the Menus in
Display section.
Complete
20170627 322
Locks and alarm
Trigger the panic alarm

b359160
Panic alarm switch
The panic alarm can be triggered in two ways:
• Press the panic alarm switch in the cab for at least 4

seconds. The siren sounds and the direction indicators
flash.
• Press and hold any button on the remote control for at

least 4 seconds.
The panic alarm can be deactivated in two ways:
• Press and hold any button on the remote control for at

least 4 seconds.
• Press the panic alarm switch for at least 4 seconds.
Emergency shutdown
If you activated the alarm using the remote control, and this is
then lost or damaged, you can carry out an emergency shut-off
using the ordinary starter key.
323 Complete
20170627
Locks and alarm
Proceed as follows:
1. Unlock the driver’s door with the starter key, the alarm
will be triggered.
2. Open the driver’s door.
3. Insert the starter key in the starter lock and turn it to the
drive position. The alarm is switched off when the key is
checked and approved.
Security central locking

The vehicle is equipped with security central locking, which
prevent unauthorised individuals from opening the vehicle’s
doors during brief stops or at low speed.
Security central locking automatically locks the vehicle doors
when you start driving. You can activate or deactivate the
function in the instrument cluster. The options are found under
section.
Security central locking can be permanently deactivated or
activated by a Scania workshop. Contact a Scania workshop for
more information.
Safety lighting and testing external lighting

With safety lighting it is safer to approach the vehicle when there
are no other light sources near the vehicle. The position lamps
and direction indicators come on with safety lighting.
Complete
20170627 324
Locks and alarm
Safety lighting and the test of external lighting is automatically

switched off:
• after 1 minute.
• if the relevant button is pressed again
• when the starter key is moved to the drive position
• when the vehicle is driven off.
The battery is located on the back of the remote control. Open

the cover by inserting a screwdriver in the hole at the Scania
logotype and carefully prising open. The battery is a lithium
battery, 3V CR 2430.
Deregistering and registering the remote control
If you have lost a remote control and require it to be blocked, a

Scania workshop can carry this out. Bring along the PIN code,
which is common to the remote control and immobiliser. The
PIN code is kept by the vehicle owner. The vehicle owner can
enlist the help of a Scania workshop if the PIN code has been
misplaced.
Symbols and alarm codes

The alarm is triggered when any of the alarm sensors gives the
signal. The direction indicators will flash and the siren will
sound. You can see which sensor has triggered the alarm by
checking the alarm codes in the display. For more information,
325 Complete
20170627
Locks and alarm
refer to the Menus in display section. Alarm symbols are shown in

display for 20 seconds. Alarm codes can be cleared by a Scania
workshop.
If you forget to close a door or hatch before arming the alarm, no
alarm code is generated.
When the alarm is triggered, this is displayed on the instrument
cluster as a yellow symbol. The sensor that triggered the alarm is
displayed with a flashing indication.
M
b358006
Symbol Alarm
Main electrical power

b358013
Starter key is in drive

position
b358012
Complete
20170627 326
Locks and alarm
Symbol Alarm
b358011 Panic alarm
Extra sensor
b358010
Cab motion detector

b358009
Inclination detector
b358008
Siren
b358007
327 Complete
20170627
Locks and alarm
Siren
The siren gives a warning using a back-up battery if the regular
power supply is cut.
Movement sensor
The vehicle is equipped with movement sensors for the cab. The
movement sensor is only activated when the alarm is activated.
The sensor is not sensitive to air movements or small objects.
This means that short-stop ventilation can be switched on when
the alarm is fully armed.
Bring the PIN code for workshop visits

Bring the alarm PIN code if you want a Scania workshop to
reprogram, upgrade or add new functions to the alarm. The code
is also needed to renew the remote control and for the workshop
to program additional remote controls for the vehicle.
Locking the vehicle with the starter key in

the drive position
The vehicle is programmed so that you can lock it with the
starter key in the drive position, e.g. when you are using the tail
lift.
Proceed as follows:
1. Leave the starter key in the drive position. Apply the
parking brake.
Complete
20170627 328
Locks and alarm
2. Lock the vehicle and activate the alarm by pressing the

remote control’s lock button.
Starter lock
Lock position
b209847
In this position you can remove the starter key. You can stop the
engine by turning the key to this position or the radio position.
When you have removed the key, turn the steering wheel until
the steering lock engages.
Position lights, hazard warning lights and some other functions
can be used when the starter key is in the lock position.
Note:
Always remove the key from the lock when
leaving the vehicle to prevent unauthorised
persons from setting the vehicle in motion.
Radio position
b209848
329 Complete
20170627
Locks and alarm
The vehicle radio works without any time limit in the radio
position.
Drive position
b209849
The whole electrical system is activated in the drive position.

The warning lamps for battery level, oil pressure, brake pressure,
etc., light up.
Start position
b209850
In the start position, the starter motor is engaged. When you

release the key, it springs back to the drive position. The vehicle
has an electronic restart inhibitor. This means that if you fail to
start the engine, you can try to start it again immediately. You do
not need to turn the key back to the radio position.
The vehicle will only start with the drive mode selector in
neutral position.
Complete
20170627 330
Locks and alarm
Immobiliser
The immobiliser is a means of electronic theft protection which
only allows the vehicle to be started with the correct starter key.
The sticker indicates that the vehicle is equipped with

b204367
an immobiliser.
Codes
Note:
The vehicle is delivered with a bag containing
the vehicle’s documents and keys. Your PIN code
for the immobiliser etc, and an encryption code
are provided in the bag. There is only one PIN
code and one encryption code for each key set.
Keep the codes in a safe place. If any of the codes
has been lost, the vehicle owner can contact a
Scania workshop for assistance.
The PIN code is needed when:

• several starter keys or remote control for locks and alarms
are added
• renewing the coordinator or engine control unit.
• adjusting parameters in the alarm system
331 Complete
20170627
Locks and alarm
The encryption code and PIN code are required when:

• renewing the coordinator or engine control unit.
• renewing the door control unit or alarm system-
• software update of the door control unit or alarm system.
Starter keys
You must use the correct starter key to start the vehicle. The
vehicle checks that the key is correct whenever it is started.
Note:
Only put one starter key on your key ring. This
applies to all vehicle types and makes. Several
keys on the same key ring may cause
malfunctions which may prevent the vehicle from
starting.
New starter keys

When the vehicle is supplied, you will receive 2 or more starter
keys. New starter keys must be programmed using a PIN or
encryption code for the vehicle immobiliser.
Lost starter keys

If you lose a starter key, you should consult a Scania workshop in
order to renew all the starter keys and lock cylinders.
Complete
20170627 332
Infotainment system
Infotainment system
Radio
Important information
This manual is a summary. A complete manual is available for
download from www.scania.com/manuals.
Read the instructions before using the radio for the first time. All
examples of menu choices in the instructions are in English. In
your radio the menu choice is in the selected language.
Overview of controls and basic functions
1 2 3 4 5
15 6
14 7
13 8
12 9
b364658
11 10
1. Left- and right-hand arrows
− In radio mode: Automatic radio station search
333 Complete
20170627
Infotainment system
− In music mode: Short press: Select track, Long

press: Quick search
2. Touch-sensitive display
3. SD card 1 (map data)
4. SD-card 2 (media files)
5. PHONE: Phone functions
6. CAMERA: Camera functions
7. DISPLAY: Light settings
− Press to switch between Auto – Day – Night
8. SETUP: Settings
9. Back button
10. Right-hand multi-function button
− Turn: Select and change
− Press: Acknowledge
11. Left-hand multi-function button
− Turn: Adjust volume
− Press: Switch the radio on/off.
12. NAVI: Navigation mode
Complete
20170627 334
Infotainment system
13. TRAFFIC: Traffic information
14. MEDIA: Switch between different audio sources
15. RADIO: Start radio mode and switch between different

sources
Overview of controls and basic functions
1 2 3 4
12 5
11 6
10 7 b364936
9 8
− In radio mode: Automatic radio station search

press: Quick search
2. Touch-sensitive display
3. SD-card (media files)
335 Complete
20170627
Infotainment system
4. PHONE: Phone functions
5. DISPLAY: Light settings
− Press to switch between Auto – Day – Night
6. SETUP: Settings
7. Back button
8. Right-hand multi-function button
− Turn: Select and change
− Press: Acknowledge
9. Left-hand multi-function button
− Turn: Adjust volume
− Press: Switch the radio on/off.
10. Home button
11. MEDIA: Switch between different audio sources
12. RADIO: Start radio mode and switch between different

sources
Complete
20170627 336
Infotainment system
Menu options and navigation method

The descriptions in this manual provide examples of how to
navigate in the radio menus. In some cases a menu may have
several input paths.
The radio can be controlled via steering wheels, buttons and
menus which are displayed on the touch screen.
Touch screen
The radio display has a touch-sensitive screen which can be

controlled by a finger.
Some parts can be operated via the steering wheel buttons. For
more information, see the steering wheel section of the Driver’s
Manual.
You can:
• Activate a menu choice by tapping the display.
• Change position in a scroll bar by moving it with your

finger.
IMPORTANT!
Risk of damage to the touch screen.
Never use sharp or hard objects when handling a
touch screen.
Multi-function button
To navigate between menu options:
337 Complete
20170627
Infotainment system
• Rotate the right-hand multi-function button clockwise or

anti-clockwise.
To activate the selected menu item:

• Press the right-hand multi-function button.
Remote control for auxiliary heater
Some of the radio functions can also be controlled by the remote

control for the auxiliary heater. For more information, refer to
Remote control for auxiliary heater.
Settings
Press the SETUP button to open the settings.
In the upper part of the screen there are 5 main menus. Under
each main menu there are a number of sub-titles which help you
to set the radio as you desire.
1. Sound
5 1 2 3 4
2. Set
3. Display
4. Settings
b364657
5. Telephone
Complete
20170627 338
Infotainment system
Sound b364894
Adjusting audio properties
It is possible to adjust the following audio properties:

• Base: low frequencies
• Middle: middle frequencies
• Treble: high frequencies
• Subwoofer
• Balance: distribution of volume between left- and right-

hand audio channels.
• Fading: distribution of volume between front and rear

audio channel.
Adjust the values using the plus and minus symbols on the
display.
Using speed-adjusted volume
You can set the radio to adjust volume to vehicle speed. A low
value produces a barely noticeable change while a higher value
produces a great volume change at different speeds.
339 Complete
20170627
Infotainment system
Setting b364893
From this menu you can set the radio’s basic settings.
• Language
• Units
• Automatic text scrolling
• Signals: Audio sound when pressing
• Start screen and overview
If Automatic is selected for language, then the language is set in

the instrument cluster. Refer to the Instrument cluster section for
more information.
Restoring factory settings
Select Factory resetting and confirm to reset to the factory

settings.
Display
b364892
Complete
20170627 340
Infotainment system
Some of these settings can also be accessed with the Display

button in the radio panel.
• Display brightness
• Screen saver
• Proximity sensor
Settings
b364891
Settings for:
• Navigation
• Telephone
• Radio: Traffic messages and Radio text
• Media: Traffic messages and Bluetooth (set and pair the

units)
• Camera
341 Complete
20170627
Infotainment system
Telephone b364895
This menu is accessed via Phone settings under Settings.
Driver profiles
The selected settings are saved to the driver card currently used
in the vehicle. When a new driver card is used in the vehicle, the
radio is set according to the card settings.
Starting the radio and selecting listening

mode
Switch the radio on or off by pressing the left-hand multi-
function button.
If the unit was on when the ignition was switched off, it comes on
automatically when the key is turned to the radio position.
If the radio is started without the key, it switches itself off after
one hour.
The following audio modes can be selected:
• Radio, press the RADIO button.
• Other audio sources, press MEDIA.
Complete
20170627 342
Infotainment system
Using the radio
Selecting band
Press the Radio button and select SRC. Select the desired band,
AM, FM or DAB.
Automatic radio station search

b364890
1. Press the symbol shown above.
2. Press the left- or right-hand arrow.
3. The radio plays the first station it finds.
4. Press the right- or left-hand arrow again to search for

another station.
You can search manually using the right-hand multi-function

button.
Saving stations manually
A number of radio stations can be saved for each band.

1. Selecting band
2. Search for the desired radio station.
343 Complete
20170627
Infotainment system
3. Press on one of the stations until a signal is heard.
4. The station is saved.
Using saved stations

1. Select band.
2. Select station.
Using other audio sources

Press the Media button and select SRC. Select desired available
audio source.
The possible options are:
• SD card
• USB device
• iPod
• Bluetooth unit
• AUX
The system does not support all versions of media available in

the market.
Complete
20170627 344
Infotainment system
Using navigation
IMPORTANT!
Distraction can cause accidents. Never enter data
while driving.
Use navigation with caution while driving. Always
be observant of the traffic conditions and the
traffic rules.
SD card for navigation missing
The radio must be equipped with an SD card for navigation in

order for the map function and navigation to work. The
following information applies to vehicles equipped with an SD
card.
Contact your dealer for more information about the SD card
which is required for your region.
The radio’s navigator helps you to plan your trip. The navigator
suggests routes and provides guidance with a voice, map or
symbols. The navigator shows information on estimated
remaining driving time and distance.
For some countries in the SD card map directory, the navigator
can suggest a route that is suited to the vehicle’s properties:
length, height, weight and cargo. The case of the accompanying
SD card contains information about the map areas or countries
which have support for vehicle properties.
345 Complete
20170627
Infotainment system
Installing navigator map data
The map data required for navigation is stored in the

accompanying SD card. Before radio navigation can be used, the
SD card must be inserted into the radio’s card slot 1.
To change a previously inserted SD card. Gently press the SD
card to release it. Then follow the above instructions.
The map data held on the card is not always up to date. To obtain
the latest map data you can order a new SD card through your
dealer.
Starting the navigator and selecting

destination
1. Press the NAVI button.
2. Press on the symbol below.

b364914
3. Select to write an address or search for another

destination.
4. Confirm the route on the display when the map is

displayed.
Complete
20170627 346
Infotainment system
5. The navigator calculates the route and starts showing it

in the navigator display.
Controlling the radio from the steering

wheel switch
1 4
2
5 Left-hand switch in the steering
b364937
3 wheel
1. SRC – Selection of audio source
− In radio mode: Short press: Change station, Long

press: Automatic radio station search

press: Quick search
3. Adjust the volume
4. Phone functions
5. Lower the volume
347 Complete
20170627
Loading and unloading

Tail lift
b372730
Tail lift switch
Press the tail lift switch to activate the tail lift. The switch is
located on the instrument panel.
1 3
1. Pushbutton
2. Raise
4
3. Open
b372729
4. Lower
Operating the tail lift
Opening
• Press in the pushbutton (1) and at the same time press

buttons (3) and (4) to open the tail lift.
Raising
• Press in button (2) to raise the tail lift.
Complete
20170627 348
Lowering
• Press in button (4) to lower the tail lift.
Closing to initial position
• Press in the pushbutton (1) and at the same time press

buttons (2) and (3) to return the tail lift to the initial
position.
Towing unit
General information on the towing unit

The vehicle is equipped with a tow hook that can be used for
towing.
Open and close the tow hook as described in the following
instructions.
Opening and closing the tow hook
1. Pull out the latch handle and

secure it by turning it one-quarter
b215774
turn anticlockwise.
349 Complete
20170627
2. Slide out the control handle,

b215775
whereby the tow hook opens.
3. The tow hook closes automatically when the drawbar is

inserted into the tow hook coupling mouth. If the tow hook does
not lock automatically: pull the control handle rearwards until
the latch handle goes into the locked position.
! WARNING!
Always check that the tow hook is locked before

driving away.
Uncoupling
1. Pull out the latch handle and turn in one-quarter turn
anticlockwise.
Complete
20170627 350
! WARNING!
When the tow hook opens, the drawbar could fall

down and cause injury.
2. Slide the control handle forwards.
3. If the control handle seizes because the tow hook is

under load, it can be undone by carefully prising with a
lever or the like; refer to illustration below.
Carefully prise if the control

b215776
handle seizes.
Trailer socket
There are two different trailer sockets behind the cab – one 7-
pin and one 15-pin.
351 Complete
20170627
b215451
Trailer socket 15 and 7-pin
General information on spiral cables

The vehicle can be supplied with spiral cables with the following
types of pin plugs:
• 7-pin
• 15-pin
• 15 to 2x7-pin
The spiral cables are supplied in the cab from the factory.
Scania spiral cables are durable and are designed to not become
tangled.
The spiral cables last longer if you avoid loading them
unnecessarily. Bear in mind the following:
Complete
20170627 352
Risk Preventative measure
If the spiral cables are Make sure that the spiral

subjected to a temperature cables do not come into
above 105°C. contact with e.g. the gearbox
or engine by fitting the spiral
cables in the parking sockets
when driving without a
trailer.
If the spiral cables are pulled Fit the spiral cables in the
out for a prolonged period of parking sockets before tilting
time. the cab.
If dirt or moisture penetrates Fit the spiral cables in the

the pin plugs. parking sockets when driving
without a trailer.
353 Complete
20170627
b215453
Parking socket
Fitting a spiral cable

1. Press the spiral cable pin plug into the trailer socket.
2. Close the latch clamp.
Check that the spiral cable pin

plug is locked in the trailer
b215452
socket.
Complete
20170627 354
Note:
After plugging in a spiral cable, check that it is
locked in the trailer socket.
Trailer socket
There are trailer sockets on the vehicle for electric connection to
civil and military vehicles.
The vehicle has a 15-pin trailer socket for civil vehicles, a 7-pin
trailer socket for ABS and two 12-pin electrical sockets for
military vehicles. The 12-pin electrical sockets are located at the
front and at the rear of the vehicle. The electrical socket at the
front are for connecting equipment and the electrical socket at
the rear is for connecting to a trailer.
The location of the trailer sockets varies depending on the
vehicle equipment.
Use the vehicle’s 12-pin trailer socket to connect the electrical
systems of two vehicles such as a truck and trailer. The trailer
socket can also be used when towing to provide electricity to the
towed vehicle. Always use the electrical cable designed for the
purpose when connecting.
355 Complete
20170627
The 12-pin electrical sockets are

located at the front and at the
b212226
rear of the vehicle.
Front 12-pin electrical socket

b212227
with open cover.

b215451
Trailer socket 15 and 7-pin
Complete
20170627 356
Compressed air, trailer connection
! WARNING!
Apply the parking brake and chock the trailer

wheels to prevent the trailer from beginning to
roll during work.
b213049
Trailer connection, ISO

b213050
Trailer connection, BSI
357 Complete
20170627
b213051
Trailer connection, Nordic
Apply the parking brake and chock the trailer before

disconnecting it. Otherwise the trailer may start moving before
the trailer parking brake has been applied.
First detach the red line (supply line) and then detach the yellow
line (control line).
When connecting the compressed air connection, first connect
the yellow line (control line) and then the red line (supply line).
Apply the parking brake and chock the trailer before
disconnecting it. Otherwise the trailer may start moving before
the trailer parking brake has been applied.
Pull the handle down and detach the trailer connection.
Fifth wheel
General information about the fifth wheel

Always check that the fifth wheel is locked properly after
coupling up a semi-trailer.
Complete
20170627 358
Maintenance of the fifth wheel is very important. A badly

lubricated and extremely dirty locking device increases the risk
that the fifth wheel will not lock properly. As driver, you are
responsible for ensuring that the fifth wheel is in such a condition
that it functions properly.
Fifth wheel maintenance includes the following:

1. Cleaning
2. Check for wear
3. Greasing
IMPORTANT!
The turning disc on the fifth wheel must be
lubricated with grease that withstands high
pressure, e.g. EP with MoS2 or grease with
graphite additive.
For fifth wheels with Teflon-coated turning discs,
a thin coating of grease must be applied after
cleaning.
Refer to the section Checks or the manufacturer’s manual for

more information.
359 Complete
20170627
Unlock the fifth wheel
1
2 5 4
b377230
1. Press the lever downwards. 4. Pull the handle backwards.
2. Pull the handle backwards. 5. Release the handle and make sure
3. Pull the handle straight out. that the catch engages in the fifth
wheel.
Coupling a semi-trailer
1. Lock the semi-trailer’s wheels using wheel chocks.
2. Check that the fifth wheel is unlocked.
The level of the semi-trailer

should be immediately below the
b201361
level of the fifth wheel.
Complete
20170627 360
3. Check that the level of the semi-trailer is immediately

below the level of the fifth wheel.
4. Reverse carefully towards the semi-trailer. The fifth

wheel locks automatically when the trailer kingpin of the
semi-trailer comes into contact with the locking
mechanism of the fifth wheel.
Uncoupling a semi-trailer
1. Lock the semi-trailer’s wheels using wheel chocks.
3. Drive carefully away from the semi-trailer.
The fifth wheel remains unlocked and you can immediately

couple up a new semi-trailer.
Check that the fifth wheel is locked/unlocked

b216022
The fifth wheel is unlocked.
361 Complete
20170627
b216023
The fifth wheel is locked.
Fifth wheel


1. Cleaning
2. Check for wear
3. Greasing
Complete
20170627 362
IMPORTANT!
graphite additive.
cleaning.

more information.

b201331
1. Remove the carabiner.
363 Complete
20170627
2. Press the fifth wheel handle

b201332
approximately 25 mm in the
vehicle’s direction of travel.
3. Pull the fifth wheel handle all

the way out. The handle should
remain extended when you
b201333
release it.
1. Chock the semi-trailer wheels.
3. Make sure that the semi-trailer plate is immediately

below the level of the fifth wheel.
Complete
20170627 364
The level of the semi-trailer plate

should be immediately below the
b201361
level of the fifth wheel.

5. Fit the carabiner.
! WARNING!
If the carabiner cannot be fitted, the fifth wheel is

not locked properly. You must then repeat the
coupling procedure from the beginning.
3. Slowly drive away from the semi-trailer.
365 Complete
20170627
Fifth wheel


1. Cleaning
2. Check for wear
3. Greasing
IMPORTANT!
graphite additive.
cleaning.
Complete
20170627 366

more information.
1 2
3
b201330
1. Pull the handle straight out. 3. Pull the handle out as far as possible
2. Pull the handle in the vehicle’s and pull it in the vehicle’s direction
direction of travel. of travel.
The fifth wheel is equipped with an indicator which means that

you can clearly see whether the fifth wheel is locked or unlocked.
367 Complete
20170627

4. Check that the fifth wheel is locked properly.
1. Chock the wheels of the semi-trailer before you start to
uncouple it.

The fifth wheel is equipped with a lock indicator which shows
whether the fifth wheel is locked or unlocked.
When the fifth wheel is locked,

the lock indicator is angled
b201328
vertically towards the handle.
Complete
20170627 368
When the fifth wheel is unlocked,

the lock indicator is angled
b201329
parallel to the handle.
Indication of locked fifth wheel

A magnetic sensor detects whether the fifth wheel is locked.

b374073
the fifth wheel is locked.
Fifth wheel


1. Cleaning
2. Check for wear
369 Complete
20170627
3. Greasing
IMPORTANT!
graphite additive.
cleaning.

more information.
Complete
20170627 370
b215591
1. Lift up the catch. 3. Pull out the handle until it stops and
2. Pull the handle in the vehicle’s pull it in the vehicle’s direction of
direction of travel. travel.
371 Complete
20170627
3. Carefully reverse the tractor unit towards the semi-

trailer. The fifth wheel locks automatically when the
trailer kingpin of the semi-trailer comes into contact
with the locking mechanism of the fifth wheel.
4. Check that the fifth wheel is locked properly.
1. Chock the wheels of the semi-trailer before you start to
uncouple it.

The fifth wheel is equipped with a catch which shows whether
the fifth wheel is locked or unlocked.
When the fifth wheel is locked,

the catch is angled vertically
b201326
towards the handle.
Complete
20170627 372
When the fifth wheel is unlocked,

the catch is angled parallel to the
b201327
handle.
Securing the vehicle on a ferry

Do as follows to prepare the vehicle for lashing on a ferry:
b360490
Attachment points for the tow pins.
1. Remove the rubber protections
2. Fasten the tow pins in the attachment points
373 Complete
20170627
To secure the vehicle on a ferry, both front attachment points

must be used. The tow pins can be ordered from Scania as a spare
part.
Complete
20170627 374
Checks
Checks
Check points
Daily maintenance
A check of the following points is done each day:
• Air pressure in each tyre of the vehicle. If no measuring

equipment is available, hit the tyres with a hammer to
compare the sounds from the tyres. If a tyre sounds
more dull than the others, this indicates that the air
pressure is low.
• Lighting.
• Lamps and windows throughout the vehicle.
• Check that the load is correctly positioned and secured.
A check of the following points must be done for the vehicle’s

fifth wheel:
• That the fifth wheel locking device is fully open before

coupling the semi-trailer to the tractor.
• That the fifth wheel is locked properly after coupling up a

semi-trailer.
Refer to the Fifth wheel section or the manufacturer’s manual for

more information.
375 Complete
20170627
Checks
A check of the following point must be done each time before

driving off:
• That the trailer is correctly connected.
A check of the following points must be done if the vehicle is

fitted with a tow hook:
• That the locking device on the tow hook is fully open

before coupling a semi-trailer to a tractor or a trailer to a
truck.
• That the locking device on the tow hook is properly

locked after you have coupled a semi-trailer.
Refer to the manufacturer’s manual for information on the daily

maintenance of the tail lift.
Lubricate the tipping cylinder joints and all the platform’s

moving parts such as flaps and hinges.
! WARNING!
Always use a platform strut when working under

the platform to avoid bodily injury.
Weekly maintenance
A check of the following points is done once a week:
• Engine oil level
Complete
20170627 376
Checks
• Coolant level
• Water separating fuel filter. For more information, refer

to the section Water separating fuel filter.
• The tail lift lifting, lowering and swing functions using

the operation units.
• The speed required to lower and swing the tail lift.
• That the hydraulic hoses can move freely.
• The tail lift switch in the cab.
• The tail lift warning lamp.
• Damage or cracking on the frame bracket, pipe

attachments and the tail lift attachments.
• Damage or wear to the under-run protection, bearing

arrangements and bolts.
Monthly maintenance
A check of the following points is done each month:
• Wheel nuts. Check tighten if necessary.
• Tyre wear
• Lubricate the tail lift’s moving parts such as the tilt or lift
cylinder bearings.
377 Complete
20170627
Checks
Maintenance in the spring and autumn
A check of the following points is done each spring and autumn:
• Check tightening of all wheel nuts.
• Radiator blind. Use a radiator blind when the outdoor

temperature is always below +5°C, otherwise remove it.
For more information, refer to the Radiator blind
section.
• Snow protection air intake. Set the snow protection air

intake to the normal position when the road surface
permits it. For more information, refer to the section
Snow protection air intake.
• The fuel. The vehicle is prepared for driving on up to

100% biodiesel EN 14 214. Scania recommends
switching to diesel that complies with the EN 590
standard if temperatures start falling to around +/- 0°C.
For more information, refer to the section Fuel,
biodiesel.
Check the brake system for leaks

If you notice that it is taking longer for the system to reach the
correct pressure, take the vehicle to a Scania workshop to be
examined.
Proceed as follows to check for leaks:

1. Switch off the engine when the brake pressure has
reached normal working pressure.
Complete
20170627 378
Checks
2. Wait for 1 minute until the hissing stops.
3. Press the brake pedal and hold it hard in the depressed

position. If the pressure falls markedly within one
minute, there is a leak present which must be rectified.
Checking brake chamber stroke length
! WARNING!
It is important that function and stroke are

checked and adjusted regularly in accordance
with the maintenance programme. Brake action
can otherwise be affected significantly.
The stroke must be adjusted by hand as the brake linings wear

down.
! WARNING!
It is important that function and stroke are

checked regularly in accordance with the
maintenance programme. Brake action can
otherwise be affected significantly.
379 Complete
20170627
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance programme
The maintenance programme for your vehicle depends on the
specification of your vehicle and how you use it. Contact a Scania
workshop to obtain the correct maintenance programme for
your particular vehicle.
Tool kit
Tool kit for changing wheels

The tool kit for changing wheels is located in the right-hand
storage compartment on the rear wall of the cab, seen in the
direction of travel. The contents of the tool kit may vary
according to the vehicle specification.
Hose assembly
The hose assembly to pump up tyres is placed in a bag with

loose objects that accompanies the vehicle.
b375551
Hose assembly.
Hose assembly and crank
The hose assembly to pump up tyres and the crank for the spare
wheel carrier are placed in a bag with loose objects that
accompanies the vehicle.
Complete
20170627 380
Maintenance
b376739
Hose assembly and crank.
Bulb and tool kit

The bulb and tool kit is usually placed on the roof shelf in front
of the passenger seat. Depending on the vehicle specification, it
may instead be placed in a bag with loose objects that accompany
the vehicle.
The bulb and tool kit contains a

set of screwdrivers, fuses and
b213134
bulbs.
381 Complete
20170627
Maintenance
Front grille panel
Handle to open the front grille

b362364
panel.
The front grille panel is opened using a handle in the door pillar
on the driver’s side of the vehicle. Grasp the handle and pull
towards you until the lock releases.
Cab tilting
! WARNING!
The pump valve must be in the lowering position

when driving. Otherwise the hydraulics may
pump up the cab and cause injury or damage.
Complete
20170627 382
Maintenance
! WARNING!
When the cab is tilted, the engine should be

switched off, the parking brake should be applied
and the gearbox should be in neutral.
! WARNING!
Do not work under a cab tilted to the

intermediate position. Always tilt the cab fully.
! WARNING!
Do not stand in front of or behind the cab during

tilting.
! WARNING!
The vehicle should be standing level when the

cab is tilted.
Never tilt the cab if the vehicle is standing on an
incline greater than 10%.
383 Complete
20170627
Maintenance
Cab tilt mechanism
1 1. Cab tilt pump

b361238
2 2. Pump valve
Cab tilt mechanism
1
1. Cab tilt pump
b361239
2
2. Pump valve
Tilting the cab

2. Put the gear lever in the neutral position.
Complete
20170627 384
Maintenance
3. Empty the cab of loose articles and heavy equipment.
4. Close the doors.
IMPORTANT!
The side panels of the front grille panel must be
open when the cab is tilted.
5. Open the upper front grille panel and the side panels of
the front grille panel. The handle bar consists of 2 parts
which are assembled using an adapter. The 2 parts of the
handle bar are located in the side panels. The adapter is
kept in the tool box.
Setting the pump valve for tilting and tilting back the
cab. The upper illustration shows the valve position
when the cab is tilted forward. The lower illustration
shows the valve position when the cab is tilted back.
Use the handle bar or adapter to set the pump valve to
b373613
the correct position.
6. Set the pump valve in the tilt position. Use the adapter
or the handle bar.
7. Put the adapter on the pump pin. Assemble the handle

bar and the adapter.
8. Pump using the handle bar and the cable lock will open
automatically.
385 Complete
20170627
Maintenance
9. Pump until the cab has tilted forward from its own
weight. Continue pumping until a counterpressure can
be felt in the pump lever and the cab has reached its full
opening angle.
Tilting the cab back
! WARNING!
Risk of crushing injuries when the cab is tilted

back. The cab falls freely during the final stage of
tilting the cab back.
1. Close the doors.
2. Set the pump valve to the position to tilt the cab back
into position.
3. Pump the cab back using the handle bar until the cab
falls back in place in the drive position movement area.
Let the pump valve remain in position for tilting back.
Tilting the cab

2. Put the gear lever in the neutral position.
Complete
20170627 386
Maintenance
3. Press the cab tilt switch.

b361808
Switch for cab tilting.
4. Empty the cab of loose articles and heavy equipment.
5. Close the doors.
IMPORTANT!
Before tilting the cab, the front grille panel’s side
panels must be opened.
6. Open the upper front grille panel and the side panels of
the front grille panel.
387 Complete
20170627
Maintenance
b361807
Remote control for cab tilting.
7. Take out the remote control for cab tilting. The remote
control is located under the front grille panel. Hold in
the activation button on the back of the remote control,
press the button for tilting and keep them pressed in
until the cab has tilted forward from its own weight.
Keep the activation button and the button for tilting
depressed until the cab has reached its full opening
angle.
Note:
Make sure that no unauthorised person has
access to the remote control for cab tilting.
Complete
20170627 388
Maintenance
Tilting the cab back
! WARNING!
Risk of crushing injuries when the cab is tilted

back. The cab falls freely during the final stage of
tilting the cab back.
1. Close the doors.
2. Take out the remote control for cab tilting. The remote
control is located under the front grille panel. Hold the
activation button on the back of the remote control,
press the button for tilting the cab back and keep them
pressed in until the cab has tilted back to its drive
position movement area.
3. Reset the switch for cab tilting.
4. Close the front grille panel’s side panels and the upper
front grille panel.
389 Complete
20170627
Maintenance
External ladder
b362248
Proceed as follows to lift the ladder off the cab:

1. Detach the rubber straps.
2. Lift up the ladder and then towards you.
Do as follows to fasten the ladder to the cab:

1. Make sure the lower end of the ladder (hooks) point
downwards.
2. Hook on the lower bracket between the third pair of

ladder rungs from the bottom.
Complete
20170627 390
Maintenance
3. Hook the upper bracket on the third pair of ladder rungs

from the top.
4. Pull the rubber straps over the ladder rungs and hook
them to the hooks on each bracket.
Renewing a bulb
Renewing a bulb in the front headlamp unit
! WARNING!
Always turn off the power before renewing bulbs.

Do not touch the headlamp reflectors with your
fingers. Wear clean gloves.
1. Open the hatch at the boarding

step unit.
2. Remove the 2 screws holding the
headlamp insert. Use a T40
screwdriver.
b355067
3. Take out the headlamp insert.
391 Complete
20170627
Maintenance
1 2 3
b355066
1. Unscrew the cover. 3. Pull the bulb out of the bracket.
2. Turn the bulbs anticlockwise and 4. Press the new bulb in.
pull them out Leave the electrical
cable in place.
Renewing the direction indicator bulb
1 2 3
4
b355065

2. Pull the bulb straight out. Leave the 4. Press the new bulb in.
electrical cable in place.
Complete
20170627 392
Maintenance
Adjusting main and dipped beam
1. Sideways adjustment dipped

2
beam
2. Height adjustment main and
b362843
dipped beam
Adjust the main and dipped beams using a T25 screwdriver.
Renewing LED bulbs

Visit a Scania workshop to have LED bulbs renewed.
Renew the tail lamp bulb

1. Undo the retaining screws on the lens. Use a T20
screwdriver.
2. Press in the bulb, turn anticlockwise and remove it.
3. Make sure the lens seals tightly when fitting.
393 Complete
20170627
Maintenance
Adjusting the front foglamp
b364839
Height adjustment
Adjust the foglamp using a T25 screwdriver.
Adjusting spotlamps on the roof
1
2
b364724
1. Height adjustment 2. Lateral adjustment
Adjust the spotlamps using a T25 screwdriver.
Complete
20170627 394
Maintenance
Adjusting spotlamps on the roof
1
2
b364725
1. Height adjustment 2. Lateral adjustment
Adjusting spotlamps in the front grille panel

b362842
Height adjustment
395 Complete
20170627
Maintenance
Bulb types
Headlamps
Function Type of Power Adjustabl

bulb e
Headlamps H7 70 W Yes
Direction indicator H21 21 W No
Bulb types
Headlamps

bulb e
Headlamps LED - Yes
Direction indicator LED - No
Complete
20170627 396
Maintenance
Tail lamp

bulb e
Position, end-outline R5W 5W No

marker, side marker
and registration plate
lamps.
Stop and reversing P21W 21 W No

lamp
Direction indicator PY21W 21 W No
Tail lamp

bulb e
Position, end-outline LED - No

marker, side marker
and registration plate
lamps.
Stop and reversing LED - No

lamp
Direction indicator LED - No
397 Complete
20170627
Maintenance
Work light

bulb e
Work light, fifth H3 70 W Yes

wheel
Working lamp, rear LED 33.6 W Yes
Working lamp, upper LED 33.6 W Yes

rear cab wall
Other lighting

bulb e
Front foglamp LED - Yes
Position LED - No
lamp/parking light
Spotlamp, roof LED - Yes
Spotlamp, front grille LED - Yes

panel
Roof sign lamp on LED - No

roof
Complete
20170627 398
Maintenance

bulb e
Roof sign lamp above LED - No

windscreen
End-outline marker LED - No

lamp
Identification lamp LED - No
Side marker lamp LED - No
Direction indicator, LED - No

side

bulb e
Rotating beacon H1, P14.5s 70 W No
399 Complete
20170627
Maintenance
Renewing a bulb in the front headlamp unit
! WARNING!
Always turn off the power before renewing bulbs.

Do not touch the headlamp reflectors with your
fingers. Wear clean gloves.
1. Open the hatch at the boarding

step unit.
2. Remove the 2 screws holding the
headlamp insert. Use a T40
screwdriver.
b355067
3. Take out the headlamp insert.
Complete
20170627 400
Maintenance
1 2 3
b355066
2. Turn the bulbs anticlockwise and 4. Press the new bulb in.
pull them out Leave the electrical
cable in place.
Renewing the direction indicator bulb
1 2 3
4
b355065

2. Pull the bulb straight out. Leave the 4. Press the new bulb in.
electrical cable in place.
401 Complete
20170627
Maintenance
Wiper blade
The wiper blades can be cleaned with the same type of alcohol as
used in the washer fluid.
IMPORTANT!
Renew damaged or uneven wiper blades. Wiper
blades in poor condition can scratch the glass.
The washer nozzles are attached to the wiper blades. Remove the
washer nozzles when renewing wiper blades.
Engine air cleaner
Blocked air filter cartridge

When the engine’s air filter cartridge is blocked, the engine will
not get sufficient air to operate optimally. The following
negative effects can occur:
• Fuel consumption increases.
• The amount of soot in the exhaust gases increases.
• The turbocharger may be damaged.
Complete
20170627 402
Maintenance
Display messages b213055
Symbol for clogged air filter cartridge
The warnings are shown in the instrument cluster display.

Symbol lights up white
The air filter cartridge is starting to get clogged. The filter must
be renewed at the next workshop visit.
Symbol lights up yellow
The air filter cartridge is clogged. Drive to the nearest Scania

workshop to renew the air filter cartridge.
Renewing the air filter cartridge

Contact a Scania workshop to renew the air filter cartridge.
Water separating fuel filter

The water separating fuel filter is located on the front part of the
chassis behind the cab. Depending on vehicle model, it is located
either on the right- or left-hand side. The same change intervals
apply as those for an ordinary fuel filter.
Drain the water

Drain the water separating fuel filter regularly. The amount of
water collected is dependent on climate and fuel quality. Under
403 Complete
20170627
Maintenance
certain circumstances it may therefore be necessary to drain the

filter every day.
If there is water in the filter, check if there is water in the fuel
tank. Shine a light into the tank using a flash light. The water in
the fuel will appear like silvery bubbles or floe. For more
information, refer to the Impurities in fuel section.
1. Shut-off cock.
b342918
2 2. Valve for draining.
1. Replaceable filter.
b208702
2 2. Valve for draining.
Complete
20170627 404
Maintenance
Note:
Exercise care to avoid getting fuel splashes on
you. Wear protective gloves and goggles.
Proceed as follows to empty the filter:

1. Switch off the engine and position a container under the
valve.
2. Clean around the dump valve and open it by carefully

screwing it.
3. Release water until fuel comes out.
4. Screw in the valve again and clean around it.
5. Start the engine and check that no fluid leaks out.
6. Dispose of the drained fluid in an environmentally

responsible manner.
Environment
Help protect the environment! Avoid spillage
and use a suitable container.
405 Complete
20170627
Maintenance
Snow protection air intake

Note:
The swirling snow position on the air intake
should only be used when driving in strongly
swirling snow, such as during snow ploughing.
When driving in strongly swirling snow, you should change the

air intake position for the engine. Change this using the manual
control which is located under the front grille panel adjacent to
the engine air intake.
When the air intake is in its normal position, air is brought to the
engine from the front of the vehicle and in the swirling snow
position the air is taken from the area by the turbocharger. The
swirling snow position prevents snow from blocking the air filter
when driving in strongly swirling snow but the maximum air flow
to the engine is lower than in the normal position. Do not,
therefore, drive with the air intake in the swirling snow position
unless you have to.
If you drive with the swirling snow position under normal winter
conditions and at temperatures above +5°C, this could cause the
engine power to be reduced and the fuel consumption to be
increased. Prolonged driving in the swirling snow position, when
this is not necessary, could damage the engine.
Complete
20170627 406
Maintenance
b341379
Push or pull the lever to change the position of the air intake.
• Outer position: swirling snow position
• Inner position: normal position

b341380
Push or pull the lever to change the position of the air intake.
• Inner position: swirling snow position
• Outer position: normal position
407 Complete
20170627
Maintenance
b213668
Turn the rotary control to change the position of the air intake.
• Turn to the counterclockwise end position for the
swirling snow position.
• Turn to the clockwise end position for the normal

position.
Radiator blind
IMPORTANT!
Use the radiator blind when the outdoor
temperature is constantly below +5°C. The
radiator blind must be removed when the outdoor
temperature is above +5°C.
If a radiator blind is not used at outdoor temperatures below

+5°C there is a risk of:
Complete
20170627 408
Maintenance
• Reduced engine power
• Engine damage
If a radiator blind is used at outdoor temperatures above +5°C

there is a risk of:
• Increased fuel consumption
• Reduced engine power
Fitting the radiator blind

Attach the radiator blind by hooking the metal hooks of the
radiator blind into the insect protection on the vehicle radiator.
There are holes which fit the width of the radiator blind. For the
radiator blind to give the desired effect, it must be fitted
completely flat against the insect protection.
Start with the hooks on the upper part and fit them as illustrated.
Then fit the lower section hooks in the same way.
409 Complete
20170627
Maintenance
b379267
Hook the radiator blind’s metal hooks in place as shown in illustration. In the
illustration, the pair of holes that suits the width of the radiator blind is used.
Fitting the radiator blind

Attach the radiator blind by hooking the metal hooks of the
radiator blind into the insect protection on the vehicle radiator.
There are holes which fit the width of the radiator blind. For the
radiator blind to give the desired effect, it must be fitted
completely flat against the insect protection.
Remove the lower metal hooks before fitting the radiator blind
so that the bottom part can be lowered down behind the bumper.
The radiator blind is only fitted with the upper metal hooks.
Complete
20170627 410
Maintenance
b379265
Hook the radiator blind’s metal hooks in place as shown in illustration.
Regeneration of the particulate filter

The vehicle is equipped with a particulate filter which cleans soot
particles from the vehicle’s exhaust gases. The particulate filter is
automatically regenerated, i.e. it is cleaned, but it can become
full. If it becomes full, it needs to be manually regenerated. If the
particulate filter becomes excessively full, the vehicle must be
taken to a Scania workshop for repair.
411 Complete
20170627
Maintenance
Display messages b374138
Symbol for regeneration of the particulate filter.
The warnings are shown in the instrument cluster display.

The particulate filter is starting to become full. Motorway
driving is recommended in order to improve automatic
regeneration of the particulate filter. You can also manually
regenerate the particulate filter.
The particulate filter is full. Carry out manual regeneration of
the particulate filter as soon as possible.
The symbol lights up red
The particulate filter is excessively full and engine power is
limited. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Switch off the
engine. Contact a Scania workshop.
Complete
20170627 412
Maintenance
Manual regeneration of the particulate filter
! WARNING!
The vehicle’s exhaust gases can become very hot

during regeneration. Make sure that people and
property are kept well away from the exhaust gas
outlet.
Manual regeneration is carried out with the engine running and

the vehicle parked in a suitable location.
For the regeneration process the following is required:
• The parking brake is applied.
• The gearbox is in neutral.
• Any power take-offs are deactivated.
• The temperature of the engine and catalytic converter is

adequate.
• The particulate filter needs to be regenerated.
• The particulate filter is not excessively full.
The regeneration process is started in the instrument cluster.

1. Use the OK button to navigate the display menu. You
can find the selection under Settings. For more
information, refer to the Menus in Display section.
413 Complete
20170627
Maintenance
2. Keep the vehicle stationary until the regeneration

process is completed. Information is shown in the
instrument cluster display.
The regeneration process is cancelled if:
• You depress the accelerator pedal.
• A fault occurs in the regeneration system.
Idling
If the engine is run with a low load for an extended period of time
(such as several hours at idling speed) the filter is warmed up,
which in turns increases idling speed. This is required to prevent
damage to the particulate filter and oxidation catalytic converter.
Draining the compressed air tanks

b204646
Drain the compressed air tanks and check if water runs out.
Small amounts of water may be present. Larger amounts of water
Complete
20170627 414
Maintenance
indicate that the air dryer is not working or that the desiccant
should be renewed. Contact a Scania workshop if necessary.
Stretch a wire rope between the holes on the drain valves to make
it easier to empty the compressed air tanks.
Marking the compressed air tanks

b374089
Front circuit
b374088
Rear circuit
b374067
Parking brake circuit
415 Complete
20170627
Maintenance
Disc brake
Checking brake discs
b204051
• Measure the brake disc thickness. Minimum permissible

thickness is 37 mm. A new brake disc is 45 mm.
• A wear edge may have formed on the outer circumference

of the discs. Measure inside the wear edge using spacers,
e.g. 2 nuts.
Note:
Remember to subtract the thickness of the nuts
from the measurement.
Complete
20170627 416
Maintenance
• Check that the brake discs have no cracks more than 1.5
mm wide or more than 40 mm long. No cracks may run
out to the edge of the brake discs irrespective of their
length.
• If the brake discs do not fulfil the above requirements,

they should be ground or renewed. Contact a Scania
workshop.
Checking brake linings

b204052
1. Measure the thickness of the brake lining between the

brake disc and the brake lining backing plate.
IMPORTANT!
Look carefully for any uneven wear as this can be
caused by the brake calliper sticking.
417 Complete
20170627
Maintenance
b204068
2. Measure any wear edges on the brake disc and add them
to the brake lining thickness.
3. If the brake lining wear surface is under 2 mm, they

should be renewed. If the brake disc thickness is less
than 40 mm, the brake lining must be at least 4 mm.
Checking the brake system
IMPORTANT!
Check the brake system for leaks regularly. If you
notice that it is taking longer for the brake system
to reach the correct pressure, take the vehicle to a
Scania workshop to be examined.
1. Stop the engine when the brake pressure is about 8 bar.
Complete
20170627 418
Maintenance
2. Press the brake pedal and hold it in the depressed

position. Read off the brake pressure in the instrument
cluster. If the pressure falls markedly within one minute,
there is probably a leak which must be rectified. Contact
a Scania workshop.
Internal cleaning
Cleaning the cab

Clean the cab’s internal surfaces and interior regularly. Vacuum
textile floor coverings and clean them with carpet shampoo and
a brush or sponge. Also vacuum the seat upholstery to remove
dust and other loose particles. Wipe the floor surfaces of the cab
clean with a damp cloth and use lukewarm water and a mild
detergent. Use a vacuum cleaner with protective grounding and
connect it to an grounded electrical socket.
Stains on upholstery
For oil stains on the seat upholstery, it is important to clean in

the right way using the correct detergent. Stains left by liquids
such as carbonated drinks or light oil must be removed
immediately. Remove as much as possible of the liquid with a
clean cloth or other material that absorbs the liquid. Then use a
detergent which is suitable for the type of upholstery, leather or
vinyl. When removing dirt or stains, it is important to work from
the outer edges of the stain and in towards the centre to avoid
ring marks. If cleaning does however leave a ring, or if there is
419 Complete
20170627
Maintenance
any remaining dirt, it will usually disappear after washing with a

lukewarm soap solution or water.
Leather upholstery
Leather upholstery should be oiled at least twice a year and

always after cleaning. Use a wax-based product intended for
oiling leather upholstery. Use soap or leather cleaner for
cleaning. Never use chemical solvents since they damage the
leather. Remember to oil the leather after cleaning. Do not
forget the steering wheel.
Vinyl upholstery
Vinyl upholstery should be cleaned with water and a soap

solution. You can also use a mixture of 1 part isopropyl alcohol
and 2 parts water (1:2).
Note:
Never use chemical solvents since they damage
the vinyl.
Complete
20170627 420
Maintenance
External cleaning
Detergent
Environment
Protect the environment. As far as possible, use
detergents that have been environmentally
adapted.
Cleaning the cab

Clean the cab frequently. When new, the cab should be cleaned
by hand with only cold water and a clean soft brush through
which the water can flow.
Avoid machine washers for the first 5-6 months until the
paintwork has had time to harden.
You can add a special vehicle detergent to the water, which
should then be lukewarm, to make washing easier. Avoid washing
and leaving the vehicle to dry in the sun.
Clean windows inside and out using window cleaner.
Remove traces of asphalt with a cloth dampened with white
spirit. Do not use strong detergents. They could make the
paintwork dry out.
421 Complete
20170627
Maintenance
Cleaning the chassis

Keep the chassis as clean as the cab. Use environmentally
adapted cleaning agents here as well.
Take care not to remove grease from spring brackets, etc. when
using high-pressure jets. If this does happen, they must be re-
greased.
Important when using high pressure cleaning

equipment
Do not use high pressure cleaning equipment on the universal
joint cross, support bearings and slide joint, for example, so as
not to damage the seals. Do not direct the jet towards seals.
Water may enter the seals and cause damage.
IMPORTANT!
Do not carry out high pressure cleaning or walk
on the silencer heat shield under the vehicle since
this may damage the material.
IMPORTANT!
If large tears occur on the heat shield, the material
must be renewed. Inadequate heat insulation
capacity can cause overheating of adjacent
components and there is a risk of personal injury.
Complete
20170627 422
Maintenance
IMPORTANT!
High pressure wash the rest cooler module at a
distance of at least 50 cm to avoid the risk of
damage and impaired performance. The rest
cooler module is located on the left-hand side of
the cab, near the battery box.
Cleaning the exhaust system
IMPORTANT!
Do not flush water into the exhaust pipe when the
engine is running. When the NOxsensor has
started, it will be damaged if in contact with water.
Flush out any remaining water by revving up the
engine to 1,500 rpm for a few seconds as quickly
as possible after starting the engine.
Cleaning aluminium rims

Dura-Flange aluminium rims from Alcoa have hardened rim
flanges to protect against wear. Clean the rims with detergent or
polishing wax. Clean the rims regularly because this prevents
brake dust and road dust from forming a moisture-retentive
coating that is difficult to clean.
423 Complete
20170627
Maintenance
Contact a Scania workshop for information on the correct

procedure for tyre changing.
Note:
The rims must not be cleaned with polishing
wash, polishing brushes, steel wool, scouring
cloths, strong detergents or chemicals. Do not
spray cold water onto hot rims.
Cleaning aluminium rims

Dura-Bright aluminium rims from Alcoa have a special surface
treatment which gives the rim a long service life and facilitates
cleaning. Clean the rims with hot water and a mild detergent
(standard vehicle detergent). Use high-pressure cleaning
equipment with hot water. Clean the rims regularly because this
prevents brake dust and road dust from forming a moisture-
retentive coating that is difficult to clean.
Contact a Scania workshop for information on the correct
procedure for tyre changing.
Note:
The rims must not be cleaned with polishing
wash, polishing brushes, steel wool, scouring
cloths, strong detergents or chemicals. Do not
spray cold water onto hot rims.
Complete
20170627 424
Maintenance
Cleaning the engine compartment

Clean the engine and engine compartment with warm water.
Use high-pressure jets with caution. Avoid spraying electrical
components such as the starter motor, alternator, etc.
Tyres and rims
! WARNING!
Never pump up the tyre on a wheel which is not

fitted on the vehicle. The wheel may be flung out
if the tyre bursts.
The vehicle’s compressed air system can be used
when pumping up tyres. To reduce the risk of a
puncture use only the parking circuit, which
supplies a maximum pressure of 8.5 bar.
Only pump up tyres which are undamaged and
which have a satisfactory tread depth.
Always adapt tyre pressure to loads. Incorrect
tyre pressure can affect roadholding.
The vehicle’s front axles are designed to give quick and

responsive steering, provide a good feel for the road and are easy
to steer. They do however require wheels that have high
standards of roundness and rims with high standards of flatness.
It is important that you follow the Driver’s Manual instructions
to avoid vibrations in the front axle caused by the wheels.
425 Complete
20170627
Maintenance
! WARNING!
Never replace tyres on rims if you do not have

the suitable equipment and necessary experience.
Mark the rim’s position in

relation to the hub so that it is
b201768
refitted in the same position.
• Front axle rims should be used for the front axle, rear axle
rims for the rear axle. Avoid mixing the two.
• Make sure that the rim complies with Scania standards for
flatness. Only use rims which meet these requirements.
Consult a Scania workshop regarding marking.
• When renewing a tyre on the front axle, the same rim

should be used. Fit rims back in the same position they
were in before removal.
Complete
20170627 426
Maintenance
• Front wheels should be balanced before fitting. If

vibration still occurs, the wheel should be balanced
whilst fitted to the front axle. The wheels are usually
balanced by tyre workshops.
• Renew both tyres at the same time on a twin mounting.
Choice of tyre
The vehicle and tyres are correctly matched on delivery.
Changing to a different tyre dimension can alter the overall gear
ratio of the vehicle. This means that the tachograph must be
reset. Contact a Scania workshop for help in resetting the
tachograph.
For information on, e.g. load index and axle weight, see the
section Tyre pressures in the Technical data chapter.
Do not exceed the maximum rated speed for the tyres. Refer to
the table for the speed index and the maximum permitted speed.
Speed index Maximum permitted speed in

km/h
D 65
E 70
F 80
G 90
427 Complete
20170627
Maintenance
Speed index Maximum permitted speed in

km/h
J 100
K 110
L 120
M 130
Type of tyre
There are two different types of tyres: radial tyres and cross-ply
tyres.
Note:
Scania advises against use of cross-ply tyres since
they have much poorer properties than radial
tyres.
Cross-ply tyres:
• Generate more heat
• Are less efficient at thermal dissipation
• Are less resistant to punctures
• Have greater rolling resistance, which leads to higher fuel

consumption
Complete
20170627 428
Maintenance
• Reduces comfort
• Have a smaller contact surface against the ground, which

reduces brake performance, drive capability, directional
stability, roadholding and produces greater and more
uneven wear.
Checking the tyres

Check that tyre wear is evenly distributed across the entire width
of the tread. When wear is uneven, it must be investigated and
the cause rectified.
Check tread depth. Different countries have different legal
requirements regarding tread depth. Comply with the legislation
of the country in question.
• If tyre pressure is too high, tyre wear increases and
comfort may be reduced.
• If tyre pressure is too low, fuel consumption increases and

tyre wear may increase.
Note:
The legal requirements for tread depth vary
depending on the country concerned.
429 Complete
20170627
Maintenance
Spare wheel
To lower the spare wheel you use a crank and the cab tilting
handle bar. The crank is placed in a bag with loose objects that
accompanies the vehicle. The handle bar consists of 2 parts that
are assembled. They are placed in the front grille side panels.
Proceed as follows to lower the spare wheel:

b347039
1. Remove the nuts securing the wheel to the holder.
Complete
20170627 430
Maintenance
b347040
2. Assemble the crank and the cab tilting handle bar. Fit
the handle bar to the spare wheel carrier and lower the
wheel to the ground.
Note:
Always screw the lifting yoke to the holder using
the nuts, even if the holder is empty.
Only wind up the lifting yoke far enough to
screw the nuts into place. Do not tighten the
lifting yoke against the spare wheel carrier.
431 Complete
20170627
Maintenance
Changing wheels
! WARNING!
Switch off the power and switch off the battery

master switch before renewing wheels on the tag
axle.
! WARNING!
Never work under a vehicle supported only by a

jack. Both the chassis and moving axle suspension
components must be secured to ensure absolute
safety when working under a raised vehicle.
There is a high risk of crush injuries.
! WARNING!
Never work under a vehicle with air suspension

which is not fully secured against falling in case
there is a change of pressure in the air bellows.
There is a high risk of crush injuries.
Complete
20170627 432
Maintenance
Removal
1. Engage a low gear and turn the key to the lock position.
Put the drive mode selector in neutral for automatic
gearboxes.
! WARNING!
You must chock the vehicle wheels to prevent the

vehicle from rolling whilst work is being carried
out.
b201769
2. Block in front of and behind the wheels remaining on

the ground.
3. Release the parking brake on the wheels to be renewed.

This is to ensure that the wheel and the brake drum are
in contact with the hub when tightening.
433 Complete
20170627
Maintenance
b201768
4. Mark the position of the rim on the hub.
5. Slacken off the wheel nuts without removing them.
6. Jack up the vehicle.
! WARNING!
Ensure that the jack is stable on level ground.
IMPORTANT!
Only position the jack at the specified lifting
points. If it is positioned differently, serious
damage to the vehicle could result.
Complete
20170627 434
Maintenance
For more information, refer to the Chassis lifting points section.
7. Remove the wheel nuts and the wheel.
Fitting
b204648
1. Thoroughly clean the contact surfaces. Use a wire

brush.
Spacing rings are fitted on some rims. Clean these as well.
Note:
Thick coats of paint, rust and dirt can lead to
loosening of the wheel nuts and consequently,
the stud holes in the rim and the brake drum
becoming oval.
435 Complete
20170627
Maintenance
b201771
2. Clean the threads of the wheel studs.
Note:
Check that the parking brake is released on the
axle in question.
b201768
Complete
20170627 436
Maintenance
3. Refit the wheel as it was positioned before removal.

Compare with the mark.
b339546
4. Tighten the wheel nuts in the correct sequence as shown

in the figure. Never use a flywheel type nut runner.
Tighten the nuts to 650 Nm.
IMPORTANT!
A Scania workshop should tighten the wheel nuts
to the correct torque. Too high or too low a
torque can cause the wheels to come loose or
make the brake drum oval.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the wheel chocks.
437 Complete
20170627
Maintenance
Scania recommends that a line is drawn above the

wheel stud and the wheel nuts so that any deviations
are easier to detect. Use a marker pen. If a wheel nut
b338216
deviates, remove the wheel nut completely and refit it.
IMPORTANT!
Check-tighten the wheel nuts to 650 Nm after
driving approx. 100 km.
Touching up paintwork
You should treat paintwork damage as soon as it is detected. The
earlier it is treated, the less risk there is of corrosion.
A professional paint shop should be used for more extensive

damage to obtain satisfactory results. However, you can repair
minor damage such as chips caused by flying stones and
individual scratches yourself.
If the damage has not gone through to the metal and there is a
coat of protective paint remaining, you can clean thoroughly and
apply the touch-up paint directly.
Scania cabs are manufactured in galvanised sheet steel. If a stone

has caused damage down to the metal and it has started to
corrode, you must first scrape away the surface rust and then
grind down the damaged area to the bare metal.
Complete
20170627 438
Maintenance
Afterwards, apply a zinc-based primer as a reinforcing layer to

retain the corrosion protection. The primer must be suitable for
use on galvanised sheet metal.
Then, apply one coat of primer. Finally, apply the finishing coat
in several thin layers so that the damaged area attains the same
height as the surrounding paintwork.
Stir the primer and finishing coat thoroughly before use. Allow
the paint to dry between coats.
Waxing and polishing

A new vehicle should not be waxed until after 5-6 months.
Polishing is not required until the paintwork has oxidised and
become dull. Polish and abrasives may be used only in
exceptional cases on a new vehicle. Contact your Scania
workshop for advice.
The paintwork must be thoroughly clean before you start waxing

and polishing.
Wheel chocks
On the vehicle there are one or two wheel chocks on the side of
the vehicle or on the back of the frame.
The wheel chocks are used when there is a risk that the vehicle
may move unintentionally.
When you remove the wheel chocks:
• Fasten the rubber strap to the holder.
439 Complete
20170627
Maintenance
After use:
• Attach the wheel chock with the rubber strap and latch
clamp, see figure.
1. Pull the rubber strap through the

slots in the wheel chock and hook
firmly to both sides of the wheel
chock. The appearance of the
bracket varies from vehicle to
vehicle.
2. Make sure the spring-loaded latch
b210784
clamp is in the correct position.
! WARNING!
When parked the vehicle must have the brakes

applied and be secured so that it cannot move.
Complete
20170627 440
Emergencies
Emergencies
Emergency exit
If an emergency situation arises, it may be necessary to evacuate
the vehicle. The door must always be used first as emergency
exits. Depending on the situation and the vehicle specification,
windows or roof hatch may also be used as emergency exits.
Emergency hammer
The emergency hammer is located behind the door on the
driver’s side in the cab. Use the emergency hammer to break the
window in the door so that you can get out in an emergency.
b380814
Emergency hammer location
441 Complete
20170627
Emergencies
! WARNING!
The vehicle is equipped with unbreakable

windows and another exit must be used in the
event of an emergency.
The vehicle is equipped with a roof hatch that can be used as an

emergency exit.
Emergency kit
The vehicle is equipped with an emergency kit.
From left: first-aid kit, sign,

reflecting waistcoat, flash light
b213137
and bracket for the flash light.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located by the cab’s rear wall, either in
the storage compartment or behind the passenger seat.
Towing and recovery

Recovery should be entrusted to a recovery company authorised
for heavy vehicles.
Recovery is always preferable to towing. All towing must be done
using a drawbar.
Complete
20170627 442
Emergencies
! WARNING!
It is common for several of the vehicle functions

to be disengaged or out of order during recovery
and towing.
IMPORTANT!
If towing or recovering the vehicle farther than
500 metres, detach the propeller shaft. If you do
not detach the propeller shaft, the gearbox could
be damaged. Refer to the section Detaching the
propeller shaft.
Preparatory work
• Before recovering from a ditch, unload the vehicle and
clear the ditch of stones etc. that may damage or get
caught in the vehicle when pulling.
• Check that no damage has occurred to the vehicle that

may cause a short circuit in the electrical system. If this
is the case, disconnect the batteries to prevent fire.
• When carrying out a recovery on a road, the vehicle

should always be lifted without a load. Alternatively, the
front axle weight can be reduced as much as possible.
443 Complete
20170627
Emergencies
• If possible, raise the tag axle. If this cannot be done,

centre the tag axle.
• Switch off the power to lock the tag axle in the current
position.
If there is a fault in the EST system
Yellow fault
The tag axle is centred automatically when a yellow fault occurs.
Switch off the power to lock the tag axle in the centred position.
Red fault
For serious faults in EST, the tag axle has to be centred
manually.
• Centre the tag axle manually or tow the vehicle straight
ahead until the tag axle is centred. The ignition must be
on when the centring is being done.
• Switch off the power to lock the tag axle in the centred
position.
If the battery voltage of the towed vehicle is low, there is a risk

that EST cannot lock the tag axle. Proceed as follows to centre
the tag axle:
1. Connect jump starter
2. Start the voltage
3. If necessary, centre the tag axle manually
Complete
20170627 444
Emergencies
4. Switch off the voltage
5. Disconnect the jump starter.
Recovery from a ditch
Vehicle with leaf spring

b201304
suspension, front
When recovering from a ditch, the spring attachment on the

front axle beam is a suitable towing point.
Recovery from a ditch

b360487
When recovering from a ditch, the front axle at the air bellows
attachment is a suitable towing point.
445 Complete
20170627
Emergencies
Recovery from a ditch – from the rear and

from the side
Attach the recovery equipment to the body frame when the
vehicle is pulled backwards or sideways.
Recovery tool
b360811
Recovery tool
When carrying out recovery of a vehicle standing on level

ground, Scania recommends using the recovery tool. The
recovery tool has been designed for lifting the vehicle. The
recovery tools can be attached to both sides of the vehicle. The
recovery tool must not be used if the vehicle to be recovered has
a front axle weight that exceeds 10 ton.
Do not lift directly by the towing brackets without using the tool.
The towing brackets will break as the distribution of forces is
incorrect.
Complete
20170627 446
Emergencies
Securing the recovery tool
Attachment point for the

recovery tool. The recovery tool
can be positioned on both sides
b360810
of the vehicle.
Filling air
If it is not possible to start the engine, the brake system must be
filled with air using an alternative method. Recovery vehicles
usually have an air outlet from which the vehicle to be
towed/recovered can be charged with air.
Your vehicle has an air inlet union located behind the cab on the
driver’s side of the vehicle.
447 Complete
20170627
Emergencies
b360489
Towing
! WARNING!
It is not permitted to tow if the towed vehicle

does not have functioning brakes.
IMPORTANT!
Never tow with the clutch pedal depressed. The
gearbox can be damaged.
Complete
20170627 448
Emergencies
b360490
When towing, the tow pin should be used together with a drawbar. The tow pin can
be positioned on both sides of the vehicle.
Pull away the rubber protection and attach the tow pin to one of
the attachment points.
The vehicle should preferably be unladen when towing. If

possible, run the engine at idle speed to obtain power steering
and air pressure in the brake system. The parking brake may be
applied automatically at a pressure drop in the brake system if it
has been released by air supplied to the brake system.
Therefore, if air is not continuously supplied from the towing
vehicle, stop at regular intervals and charge the air system.
b360488
449 Complete
20170627
Emergencies
High demands are placed on the person steering the towed

vehicle. The drawbar can turn in relation to the attachment. It
can result in the vehicles colliding. The illustration shows how
the vehicles should be in relation to each other while towing.
The vehicle should preferably be unladen when towing. If

possible, run the engine at idle speed to obtain power steering
and air pressure in the brake system. The parking brake may be
applied automatically at a pressure drop in the brake system if it
has been released by air supplied to the brake system.
Therefore, if air is not continuously supplied from the towing
vehicle, stop at regular intervals and charge the air system.
b376335
High demands are placed on the person steering the towed

vehicle. The drawbar can turn in relation to the attachment. It
can result in the vehicles colliding. The illustration shows how
the vehicles should be in relation to each other while towing.
Complete
20170627 450
Emergencies
Tow-starting
IMPORTANT!
Tow-starting must not be done for stretches
longer than 500 metres. Otherwise, the gearbox
could be damaged through insufficient
lubrication.
Proceed as follows:
1. Use a drawbar.
2. Fill the vehicle with air.
3. The drive mode selector must be in high range in the

vehicle that is to be tow-started.
GRS GR
H H
b201789
Select manual and engage a suitable gear.
451 Complete
20170627
Emergencies
Shunting
IMPORTANT!
Shunting with the engine switched off must not
be carried out for more than 500 metres unless the
propeller shaft is disconnected from the rear axle
central gear. This is to avoid damage to the
gearbox.
GRS GR
H H
N N
b201405
The drive mode selector must be in high range and the gearbox
in neutral.
Proceed as follows:
1. Switch on the power.
2. Engage a gear in the high range area, turn the ring on

the Opticruise lever directly to neutral.
Complete
20170627 452
Emergencies
Detaching the propeller shaft

IMPORTANT!
The gearbox oil pump is not driven during towing
and recovery. To avoid damage to the gearbox,
the propeller shaft should therefore be detached
from the rear axle central gear and secured to the
frame.
If the propeller shaft is detached from the rear of
the gearbox, there is a risk that it will rotate and
strike and damage the cables in the chassis frame.
There is also a risk that even the propeller shaft
will be damaged.
453 Complete
20170627
Emergencies
b201247
Disconnect the propeller shaft, P400-P500
Proceed as follows:
Complete
20170627 454
Emergencies
b201955
2. Undo the screws in the central gear end yoke.
IMPORTANT!
If any of the bearing retainers fall off a new
universal joint cross with bearing retainer must be
fitted. This is because dirt may have penetrated.
b201956
455 Complete
20170627
Emergencies
3. Screw in M16 screws (4 off) in the two bearing retainers.

Tighten the screws alternately towards the end yoke
until both bearing retainers are loose.
IMPORTANT!
Do not use a nut runner.
b366875
4. Hold the shaft and remove the screws.

b209493
Complete
20170627 456
Emergencies
5. Attach the shaft to the chassis and cover the universal

joint and bearing retainer with a plastic bag.
If the spring is broken or missing, tie the bearing retainers to the

universal joint cross so the bearing retainers do not fall off. Then
secure the shaft to the chassis. b201957
Disconnect the propeller shaft, P604, P644
Proceed as follows:
457 Complete
20170627
Emergencies
b366874
2. Undo the screws at the rear axle central gear.

b366873
3. Screw in M12 screws (2 off) in the two bearing retainers.

Tighten the screws alternately towards the end yoke
until both bearing retainers are loose.
IMPORTANT!
Do not use a nut runner.
4. Hold the shaft and remove the screws.
Complete
20170627 458
Emergencies
b201986
5. Secure the axle to the chassis. If the propeller shaft is at

risk of exposure to dirt or water cover the cross slots on
the propeller shaft flange.
Release the parking brake without

compressed air
Be aware that the vehicle is completely without brakes when you
carry out the following actions.
459 Complete
20170627
Emergencies
! WARNING!
When the parking brake is disabled and the

compressed air system of the vehicle is empty, the
vehicle will not have any working brakes.
To release the parking brake without any compressed air,

proceed as follows:
1. Lock the wheels with wheel chocks or connect a towing
bar to another vehicle to prevent the vehicle from
moving.
b201312
2. Undo the release bolts in the spring brake chambers.

Slacken a release bolt by turning it until it gets
resistance, see the following illustration. The bolt can
come out about 35 or 60 millimetres, depending on
whether it is a disc brake or a drum brake.
Complete
20170627 460
Emergencies
The release bolt will come out a

little from the cylinder when it is
b201852
undone.
IMPORTANT!
Do not use a nut runner to loosen or apply the
release bolt in the spring brake chamber as the
release bolt can break.
3. Affix a label on the steering wheel to warn that the

vehicle is without brakes.
SE
BR NO
AK
b211673
461 Complete
20170627
Emergencies
Chassis lifting points
! WARNING!
Both the chassis and moving axle suspension

components must be secured against falling with
axle stands to ensure absolute safety when
working under a raised vehicle.
! WARNING!
Never work under a vehicle only supported by a

jack!
Apply the parking brake and block the wheels before lifting the
vehicle with a jack. Ensure that the jack is stable on level ground.
Complete
20170627 462
Emergencies
Lifting points on the front axle
By the bracket under the air

b201242
bellows.
Lifting points on the front axle
Use the adapter found in the tool

b201241
kit.
463 Complete
20170627
Emergencies
Lifting points on the rear axle
b201244
By the spring mounting.

b201746
By the intended jack point.
Complete
20170627 464
Emergencies
Lifting points on the rear axle
b201243
By the spring mounting.
Filler nipple for parking brake circuit

The filler nipple is used to fill the parking brake circuit with air,
when for example towing short distances.
b356971
Filler nipple for parking brake circuit
Do the following to top up air:

1. Chock the wheels so that the vehicle cannot move.
2. Remove the cover over the filler nipple using a

screwdriver, for example.
465 Complete
20170627
Emergencies
3. Top up air for the parking brake circuit, e.g. with a hose
from a tyre or from another vehicle.
4. Loosen the interlock valve, if the vehicle is fitted with

such.
5. Release the parking brake lever.
The parking brake can now be applied normally, but only once.
Complete
20170627 466
Electrical system
Electrical system
Fuses and relays
Opening the central electric unit
! WARNING!
When renewing a fuse, disconnect the power by

using the battery master switch or remove the
battery minus terminal.
IMPORTANT!
Always fit a fuse of the rating specified in the list
and of a type that is equivalent to the original fuse.
1 1. Remove the side panel.

2. Turn the locking device. Remove
the panel by carefully loosening
2
the clips, starting from the right-
hand corner. Then remove the
b364640
panel from the hook.
467 Complete
20170627
Electrical system
1 1. Remove the side panel.

2. Turn the locking device. Remove
2 the panel by carefully loosening
the clips, starting from the left-
hand corner. Then remove the
b369448
panel from the hook.
Symbols for fuses and relays
Fuses
b206546
Relays
b206545
Complete
20170627 468
Electrical system
Fuses
Position Symbol Explanation
1 Relay for electrical

equipment that is not
b374117
activated until the engine has

started.
2 Door node, driver’s side

b364585
3 Door node, passenger side

b364584
4 Coordinator
b206487
5 Starter key
b364583
469 Complete
20170627
Electrical system
6 Diagnostic socket
b206506
7 CAN node
b206487
8 24 V socket
b206509
9 RTC (Communication unit)

b373782
10 Fuse for distance sensor

b364581
Complete
20170627 470
Electrical system
11 Tachograph
b206489
12 External lighting
b364580
13 Fan
b364579
14 Instrument cluster
b206488
16 LIN remote control

b206487
471 Complete
20170627
Electrical system
17 Coffee maker
b206541
18 FLC (Forward Looking

Camera System)
b364578
19 CTS (Clock and timer

system)
b364577
20 Internal lighting
b206455
21 Fuel heater
22
b206474
Complete
20170627 472
Electrical system
23 Rotating beacon
b206453
24 BCI (Communication
interface to the bodywork)
b364576
25 Bodywork equipment
b374153
26 Alarm
b206498
27 Short-stop heater
b364577
473 Complete
20170627
Electrical system
28 Refrigerator
b206508
29 Cab tilting
b373783
30 Spotlight
b373655
31 Alcolock
b364589
32 WTA (Auxiliary water

heater)
b364577
Complete
20170627 474
Electrical system
33 Roof hatch
b373611
35 Road toll unit
36
b206535
37 Locking steered rear axle on

trailer
b206460
40 Remote vehicle immobiliser
41
b373654
b206455
475 Complete
20170627
Electrical system
44 Emission control system
b206473
45 Fuel cooler
46
b213896
47 Automatic chassis lubrication

b206517
48 Telephone
b364596
49 Retractable boarding step

unit
b206540
Complete
20170627 476
Electrical system
50 Subwoofer
b364595
51 Parking cooler
b364594
52 Cab tilting
b373783
53 Work light
b373656
54 Parking brake
b364592
477 Complete
20170627
Electrical system
55 APS (Air processing system)
b206468
56 Allison gearbox
b206469
57 Auxiliary cab cooler

b373669
59 ABS on trailer
b374086
60 Trailer lighting
b364591
Complete
20170627 478
Electrical system
101 Side marker lamp
b364588
102 Roof sign lamp and rear

position lamp, right-hand
side
b364609
103 Position and side marker

lamps, left-hand side
b364608
104 Position and side marker

lamps, right-hand side
b364607
105 Position lamps on trailer,

left-hand side
b364606
479 Complete
20170627
Electrical system
106 Position lamps on trailer,

right-hand side
b364605
107 Spotlights and rear position

lamp, left-hand side
b364604
108 BWE (Bodywork electrical

system)
b364603
109 Position lamp, box truck

bodywork
b366639
121 15 voltage
b364602
Complete
20170627 480
Electrical system
122 Window winders, driver’s

side
b364601
123 Window winder, passenger

side
b364600
124 Tachograph
b206489
125 Seat heating

b364619
126 Airbag
b206514
481 Complete
20170627
Electrical system
127 Alcolock
b364589
128 Rear view mirror heating

b206493
136 Cigarette lighter

b206515
137 Tag axle lift

b206459
138 Remote vehicle immobiliser

b373654
Complete
20170627 482
Electrical system
139 Road toll unit
b206535

system)
b364618
141 Reverse alarm switched off

b373610
142 ABS on trailer

b206476
143 Tipper body

b373652
483 Complete
20170627
Electrical system
144 Tipper body heating
b373653
145 Road toll unit

b206535
146 UFS (Unlocking of Fifth

Wheel Slider)
b373670
151 Radio
152
b206499
153 12 V socket
b206497
Complete
20170627 484
Electrical system
154 Climate control
b206542
155 Radio
b206499
156 CBR (Two-way radio)

b364615
157 TV
b364614
159 Rain sensor

b364613
485 Complete
20170627
Electrical system
160 12 V socket
b206497

b374153
system)
182 Microwave oven

b206541
183 Electrically heated

windscreen
b215841
191 COO (Coordinator)

b206487
Complete
20170627 486
Electrical system

system)
b364612
193 POW (Distribution of

electrical power in the
vehicle)
b364611
194 COO (Coordinator)

b364610
Relays
8 Brake lights, trailer

b364591
487 Complete
20170627
Electrical system
14 15 relay
b374115
19 61 relay
b374117
20 15 relay
b374115
21 58 relay
b374116
b206455
43 Water separating fuel filter

b206474
Complete
20170627 488
Electrical system
46 Fuel heater
b206474
86 Locking steered rear axle on

trailer
b206460
88A Retractable boarding step

unit
88B
b206540
89A Reverse alarm switched off

b373610
103 Fuel cooling
104
b213896
489 Complete
20170627
Electrical system
106 Electrically heated

windscreen
107 b215841
110 Automatic chassis lubrication

b206517
112 Radio
b206499
115 Work light

b373656
E21 Tag axle lift

b206459
Complete
20170627 490
Electrical system
Central electric unit on chassis
b365992
! WARNING!
When renewing a fuse, disconnect the power by

using the battery master switch or remove the
battery minus terminal.
Position System
301 COO
302 EEC
303 GMS
491 Complete
20170627
Electrical system
Position System
304 BMS, EBS
305 BMS
306 GMS (Allison)
307 Not connected
308 GMS (Allison)
309 EMS
310 EMS (throttle)
311 TPM
312 AWD
313 EPB
314 CMS
315 SMS
316 EST
317 EPB
318 EMS, GAS, OCS
319 Equaliser
320 EMS, VGT
Complete
20170627 492
Electrical system
Position System
321 EMS, GAS, ICM
322 EMS
323 EMS, GAS, GSC
324 Battery charger
Batteries
Risks
Handle the batteries as instructed below. Use protective
equipment, gloves and eye protection.
! WARNING!
The vehicle batteries contain corrosive, diluted

sulphuric acid and the toxic metal lead. Lead is
harmful to humans and the environment. Wash
your hands after contact with the battery. The
batteries should be handled in accordance with
national regulations on environmentally
hazardous substances.
493 Complete
20170627
Electrical system
! WARNING!
In case of acid splashes in your eyes: rinse

immediately with running water for at least 15
minutes.
Always seek medical attention if you get acid in
your eyes.
If you splash acid on other parts of your body:
rinse immediately with water. Then wash your
clothes in a normal water wash.
Do not stand close to the batteries while jump
starting the vehicle. A battery can explode
because oxyhydrogen gas may be formed in the
battery during charging.
Short circuits can cause burns and fire.
Note:
discharging of the batteries when using e.g. rest
cooler or other equipment that affects the
lighting or climate.
Complete
20170627 494
Electrical system
Charging
• If power is used from the batteries they should be
recharged within a day or two.
• Repeated starts and extended periods of idling provide

less effective charging than long runs. Charge the
batteries if they are not charged through driving.
• It is more difficult to charge a battery at low

temperatures.
! WARNING!
Explosive gas is formed when batteries are being

charged. Smoking is forbidden and any apparatus
that can cause sparks must not be in the vicinity.
Note:
Always remove the ground connection (negative)
before charging.
Never connect 12 V equipment, e.g. a radio, to
only one of the batteries. The other battery can
then be overloaded.
495 Complete
20170627
Electrical system
Slow charging
Slow charging is always preferable except in real emergencies.
The current level should be approximately 10% of the battery
capacity. A battery with a capacity of 180 Ah should be charged
with approx. 20 A.
Boost charging
Boost charging means that the battery is recharged with a higher
current for a shorter period of time.
Avoid boost charging the battery. The load on the batteries is
very high when boost charging and may impair their service life.
IMPORTANT!
One cable terminal must be disconnected before
boost charging. Otherwise, there is a significant
risk of damage to the vehicle’s electronic control
units.
Trickle charging
If the vehicle is not to be used for a long period, Scania
recommends trickle charging in order to avoid damaging the
batteries.
Complete
20170627 496
Electrical system
Maintenance
The exterior condition of the batteries must be inspected
regularly. Oxide, dirt and moisture can generate leakage currents
and discharge the batteries. The oxide can also result in poor
connections and voltage drop.
Maintenance instructions:
• Make sure that the batteries, battery terminals, electrical
cables and battery box are clean. Clean with water.
• Check that the battery connections are intact. Grease

battery terminals and cable terminals with Vaseline.
Corroded battery cable terminals lead to poor
connection with a reduced current capacity as a result.

b202806
Take scrapped batteries to Scania dealers or workshops. They

will dispose of the batteries in accordance with national
497 Complete
20170627
Electrical system
legislation and make sure that they go for environmentally

appropriate recycling. Battery disposal is a free service.
Note:
Renew both batteries at the same time.
Removal
+ +
b204328
Disconnect the ground connection (negative terminal) first and

then the other connections.
IMPORTANT!
Do not disconnect the batteries while the engine
is running. The alternator and other electrical
components can be damaged.
Complete
20170627 498
Electrical system
Note:
Do not knock on the battery cable terminals.
Pole connections and cell plates may come loose.
Fitting
2 1
+ +
b204327
First connect positive cable 1 and then ground connection 2 to

the battery’s negative terminal. Tighten the cable terminals well.
IMPORTANT!
Do not mix up the battery connections. The
alternator or other electrical components can be
damaged.
499 Complete
20170627
Electrical system
Renewing the batteries at the rear end of the

frame
IMPORTANT!
Use only original Scania batteries when the
batteries need to be renewed. They are designed
for the demands placed on batteries fitted at the
rear end of the frame.
Batteries
General information on batteries

The vehicle is equipped with a dual battery system. A pair of
service batteries which provide power when the engine is not
running and a pair of starter batteries which are only used to start
the engine. Other power consumption is normally handled by
the alternator.
Note:
The starter batteries have sufficient power to
start the engine, even if the other service
batteries in the vehicle seem discharged.
If the engine does not start, in rare cases the
batteries may be completely discharged. Check
that all current consumers in the cab are switched
off. Wait for a few minutes and try to start the
Complete
20170627 500
Electrical system
engine again.
discharge of the service batteries when using e.g.
short-stop cooler or other equipment that affects
the lighting or climate.
Risks
Handle the batteries as instructed below. Use protective
equipment, gloves and eye protection.
! WARNING!
The vehicle batteries contain corrosive, diluted

sulphuric acid and the toxic metal lead. Lead is
harmful to humans and the environment. Wash
your hands after contact with the battery. The
batteries should be handled in accordance with
national regulations on environmentally
hazardous substances.
501 Complete
20170627
Electrical system
! WARNING!
In case of acid splashes in your eyes: rinse

immediately with running water for at least 15
minutes.
Always seek medical attention if you get acid in
your eyes.
If you splash acid on other parts of your body:
rinse immediately with water. Then wash your
clothes in a normal water wash.
Do not stand close to the batteries while jump
starting the vehicle. A battery can explode
because oxyhydrogen gas may be formed in the
battery during charging.
Short circuits can cause burns and fire.
Maintenance
The exterior condition of the batteries must be inspected
regularly. Oxide, dirt and moisture can generate leakage currents
and discharge the batteries. The oxide can also result in poor
connections and voltage drop.
Some maintenance advice:
• Make sure that the batteries, battery terminals, electrical
cables and battery box are clean. Wash with hot water.
Complete
20170627 502
Electrical system
• Check that the battery connections are intact. Grease

battery terminals and cable terminals with Vaseline.
Corroded battery cable terminals lead to poor
connection with a reduced current capacity as a result.
Recycle scrapped batteries

b202806
Take scrapped batteries to Scania dealers or workshops. They

will dispose of the batteries in accordance with national
legislation and make sure that they go for environmentally
appropriate recycling. Battery disposal is a free service.
Battery master switch

Use the battery master switch to quickly disconnect the power in
an emergency, when loading and unloading the vehicle or to save
energy in the batteries at prolonged breaks in driving.
When the battery master switch is turned off, power is always

supplied to the tachograph. Depending on the vehicle’s
specification, the alarm and immobiliser may also have power.
503 Complete
20170627
Electrical system
When the battery master switch is off, the power to the central
locking is also off and therefore it is impossible to lock the vehicle
with e.g. the remote control.
Wait for at least 10 seconds after switching off the voltage before
switching off the battery master switch.
! WARNING!
When the battery master switch cuts off the

power, the engine stops. The vehicle becomes
difficult to control if this occurs when moving.
Stop the vehicle, if possible, before cutting off
the power.
IMPORTANT!
Wait for at least 1.5 minutes after switching off
the power before switching off the battery master
switch. Otherwise the SCR system will not have
had time to be purged of reductant residue, which
could damage the system.
Complete
20170627 504
Electrical system
IMPORTANT!
Do not switch off the battery master switch if the
symbol for the exhaust gas aftertreatment system
is displayed.
b363507
Switch for battery master switch
If a fault occurs in the cable harness or battery master switch, the

switch will indicate this as follows:
• Flashes yellow: The battery master switch failed to switch

off the current or switched it off incorrectly. Try again.
• Lights up yellow: Only one electric circuit has been

switched off. Contact a Scania workshop for checking.
505 Complete
20170627
Electrical system
b363506
Rotary control for battery master switch.
Battery charger
Voltage inlet to the battery

b375290
charger
Note:
Do not switch off the power with the battery
master switch during charging as the battery will
not be charged then.
Complete
20170627 506
Electrical system
The battery charger supplies the vehicle’s batteries with

charging from a standard grounded electrical socket. The
voltage is connected via a switch above the vehicle’s batteries and
provides voltage to the battery charger, and also to the vehicle’s
engine heater, if fitted.
When the electrical cable is connected between the vehicle and

the electrical socket, battery charging is started immediately.
The charging voltage is displayed in the instrument cluster. The
value varies between 26 V and 28.8 V provided the vehicle’s
engine is not running.
Electrical input for the battery charger and the

b376395
electrical engine heater.
Adaptive battery charging

The ability of the battery to charge is dependent on the
temperature of the battery. A cold battery is less able to accept
the charge than a warm battery. Cold batteries therefore reach a
better state of charge if they are charged at a high charging
voltage.
The adaptive battery charging function means that the charging
voltage from the alternator is adapted to the battery temperature.
The charging voltage therefore increases when the battery is
cold and reduces when the battery is warm. The charging voltage
507 Complete
20170627
Electrical system
is set automatically and cannot be controlled manually. You can

see how high the charging voltage is on the instrument cluster.
The value may vary between 26 V och 30 V.
Jump starting
! WARNING!
Do not stand close to the batteries when using

starter cables. A battery can explode causing
severe injuries.
Do not connect batteries in an environment
where there are flammable gases or fluids such as
petrol and ethanol.
Follow the instructions exactly to ensure that
injuries and damage do not occur.
IMPORTANT!
Jump starting is only permitted using batteries or
Scania jump starter unit Eurotec 2024 L20.
A different jump starter unit can cause serious
damage to the vehicle’s electrical systems.
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged and cannot provide enough

current to start the engine you can connect it to other batteries.
Both systems must have the same battery voltage, i.e. 24 V.
Complete
20170627 508
Electrical system
Use heavy-duty jump leads – at least 25 mm² – with insulated

clamps.
Preparations:
• Start the engine on the vehicle which has charged

batteries.
• All connections (+) should be made on the vehicle battery

which has its positive cable connected directly to the
electrical system.
Proceed as follows:
b201071
1. Connect to the battery positive terminal (+) on the

vehicle with a low battery voltage.
2. Connect to the battery positive terminal (+) on the fully

charged vehicle.
509 Complete
20170627
Electrical system
3. Connect to the battery negative terminal (-) on the fully

charged vehicle. Select the negative terminal (-) which is
connected to the chassis.
4. Connect to an electrical ground point (e.g. using the

battery cable bracket in the frame) a short distance from
the battery itself on the vehicle with a low battery
voltage. This last electrical cable may produce a spark
when connected.
Note:
If the protective paint on the frame is damaged it
needs to be touched up immediately.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with low battery voltage.

Do not stand close to the batteries.
6. When the engine has started, detach the electrical cable

from the frame first and then the other electrical cables.
Complete
20170627 510
Electrical system
IMPORTANT!
Do not run the starter motor for more than 30
seconds during each start attempt. If the engine
has not started after 2 attempts, troubleshoot for
a fault. The starter motor must rest for at least 5
minutes before the next start attempt. The starter
motor is automatically blocked after 35 seconds.
Jump starting
! WARNING!
Do not stand close to the batteries when using

starter cables. A battery can explode causing
severe injuries.
Do not connect batteries in an environment
where there are flammable gases or fluids such as
petrol and ethanol.
Follow the instructions exactly to ensure that
injuries and damage do not occur.
511 Complete
20170627
Electrical system
IMPORTANT!
Jump starting is only permitted using batteries or
Scania jump starter unit Eurotec 2024 L20.
A different jump starter unit can cause serious
damage to the vehicle’s electrical systems.
If the vehicle’s batteries are discharged and cannot provide

enough current to start the engine you can connect them to
other batteries.
Both systems must have the same battery voltage, i.e. 24 V.
Use heavy-duty jump leads – at least 25 mm² – with insulated

clamps.
Preparations: Start the engine on the vehicle which has charged

batteries.
Complete
20170627 512
Electrical system
Proceed as follows when the vehicle requires a jump start:
2
3
1
1. Connect to the service battery positive terminal (+) on b364039
the vehicle with a low battery voltage.
2. Connect to the battery positive terminal (+) on the fully

charged vehicle.
3. Connect to the battery negative terminal (-) on the fully

charged vehicle.
4. Connect to the battery negative terminal (-) on the

vehicle with low battery voltage. This last electrical
cable may produce a spark when connected.

513 Complete
20170627
Electrical system
6. Once the engine has started, first disconnect the

electrical cable to the battery’s negative terminal (-) on
the vehicle with low battery voltage, and then the other
electrical cables.
7. If the engine does not start. Disconnect the electrical

cables according to step 6 and repeat all steps with one
exception. At step 1, connect to the battery’s positive
terminal (+) on the inner battery of the vehicle with low
battery voltage.
Proceed as follows when the vehicle is giving a jump start:
1
4
2
3
b364038
1. Connect to the battery positive terminal (+) on the

vehicle with a low battery voltage.
Complete
20170627 514
Electrical system
2. Connect to the service battery positive terminal (+) on

the fully charged vehicle.
3. Connect to the service battery negative terminal (-) on

the fully charged vehicle.
4. Connect to the battery negative terminal (-) on the

vehicle with low battery voltage. This last electrical
cable may produce a spark when connected.

6. Once the engine has started, first disconnect the

electrical cable to the battery’s negative terminal (-) on
the vehicle with low battery voltage, and then the other
electrical cables.
Note:
If the protective paint on the frame is damaged it
needs to be touched up immediately.
515 Complete
20170627
Electrical system
IMPORTANT!
Advice when engine is difficult to start:
The starter motor is automatically blocked after
35 seconds.
Run the starter motor for a maximum of 30
seconds. If the engine does not start at the first
attempt: return the key to the radio position and
wait for approx. 30 seconds to allow the starter
motor to recover.
If the engine has not started after 2 attempts, the
starter motor must rest for at least 5 minutes
before 2 new attempts are made. Inspect for any
other fault, e.g. a fuel system fault.
Jump socket
At the back of the chassis there is a socket for jump starting.
Complete
20170627 516
Electrical system
b364037
517 Complete
20170627
Bodywork
Bodywork
EG power take-off
The gearbox-driven power take-off, EG, transfers power from
the gearbox to external accessories. It is located on the gearbox,
driven by the gearbox layshaft and is not normally engaged.
Before you activate the EG power take-off, the starter key must
be in the drive position and the air pressure above 5 bar.
The bodybuilder can choose to make different conditions
applicable.
IMPORTANT!
Run the engine at idling speed for approximately
1 minute after driving before switching off the
engine. Otherwise there is a risk of the
turbocharger being damaged.
b361445
Switch for EG power take-off.
The vehicle may be equipped with several power take-offs.
You can control the engine speed to the EG power take-off by

pressing + or - on the cruise control switch.
Complete
20170627 518
Bodywork
IMPORTANT!
When using the high-speed EG power take-off,
the vehicle should be as level as possible. It can
only be on a downhill slope for a short time.
For gearboxes with a splitter gear, 2 different power take-off

speeds may be supplied at the same engine speed depending on
whether low or high split mode is engaged when the gearbox is
in neutral.
You change splitter mode manually by pressing the auxiliary

brake lever towards or away from you.
When the EG power take-off is engaged, all gear changing is

inhibited when driving. You can, however, change gear when
stationary. If the vehicle is driven away with an EG power take-
off activated, a message is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Engaging
IMPORTANT!
Only engage or disengage the power take-off
when it is not under load. Only change gear when
the power take-off is not under load; otherwise
the gearbox may be damaged.
519 Complete
20170627
Bodywork
2. Engage neutral.
3. Press the switch.
4. Wait until the power take-off symbol appears in the

instrument cluster.
IMPORTANT!
If there is an unusual noise from the gearbox press
the switch immediately. The power take-off is
then disengaged automatically.
Note:
If the power take-off symbol has not come on in
the instrument cluster after 20 to 30 seconds,
repeat steps 3 and 4.
Engaging by using the clutch pedal
To get more control of the engagement of the EG power take-

off you can use the clutch pedal.
2. Depress the clutch pedal if the engine is running.
3. Engage neutral.
4. Press the switch.
Complete
20170627 520
Bodywork
5. Wait until the power take-off symbol appears in the

instrument cluster.
6. Gently release the clutch if the engine is running.
Note:
If no symbol is displayed after 10 seconds, gently
release the clutch so that the gear teeth end up in
the right position. Do not press the switch again.
Disengaging
2. Engage neutral.
3. Press the power take-off switch.
4. Wait until the power take-off symbol goes off in the

instrument cluster.
Disengage by using the clutch pedal

2. Depress the clutch pedal if the engine is running.
3. Engage neutral.
4. Press the power take-off switch.
521 Complete
20170627
Bodywork
5. Wait until the power take-off symbol goes out.
6. Gently release the clutch if the engine is running.
IMPORTANT!
When using the high-speed EG power take-off,
the vehicle should be as level as possible. It can
only be on a downhill slope for a short time.
EK power take-off
The power take-off is an external shaft journal for transferring
power from the gearbox to external accessories. The EK power
take-off is located between the engine and the gearbox and is
driven by the engine. The power take-off is not engaged when
the switch is in its normal position.
b361447
Switch for EK power take-off.
You can control the engine speed to the EK power take-off by

Complete
20170627 522
Bodywork
IMPORTANT!
The engine must be switched off before the
power take-off is engaged.
Engaging
1. Switch off the engine.
2. Put the gear in neutral.
4. Activate the switch.
5. Start the engine.
Disengaging
1. Make sure the power take-off is not under load.
2. Deactivate the switch.
ED power take-off
The power take-off transfers power from the engine to external
accessories. ED power take-off is driven directly by the timing
gear and rotates when the engine is started. The switch activates
the hydraulics and supplies pressure to the system.
The bodybuilder can choose to make different conditions
applicable.
523 Complete
20170627
Bodywork
b375415
Switch for ED power take-off.
You can control the engine speed to the ED power take-off by

Engaging
1. Activate the switch
Disengaging
1. Deactivate the switch
Bodybuilding and conversions

IMPORTANT!
The bodybuilder homepage and its instructions
must be applied to all bodywork and conversion
projects. You find the bodybuilder homepage at
truckbodybuilder.scania.com.
Always contact a Scania workshop when carrying out bodywork

and conversion projects, or in case of any queries (concerning
bodywork and conversion projects), to gain access to this
Complete
20170627 524
Bodywork
technical information. Vehicles lacking in equipment or

functions which consequently do not meet the technical
requirements may constitute a hazard and it may be unlawful to
drive them on public highways.
IMPORTANT!
Changes to the vehicle, particularly the
retrofitting of electrical equipment or changes to
electrical components and their software, must be
carried out in a professional manner. The illegal
copying of software may, therefore, make you
liable for infringement of copyright. Scania
cannot be held responsible for the consequences
of work not carried out professionally.
IMPORTANT!
Direct connection with the vehicle’s CAN buses
or via the diagnostics socket to retrieve data or
other reason is not permitted. This could be
extremely dangerous since it could affect the
functionality of the vehicle’s systems, e.g. engine
or brake. The SCANIA FMS and SCANIA BCI
interfaces must be used in these cases.
525 Complete
20170627
Bodywork
IMPORTANT!
The 66-pin connectors in the bulkhead are only
intended for Scania-fitted equipment and may
only be used for conversion of the vehicle with
original equipment.
IMPORTANT!
Direct connection to the battery’s positive and
negative terminals is not permitted.
Wet kit
bar
150
ar
0b
22
b361122
Set the pressure in the hydraulic system using the rotary control.
It is possible to set the pressure in the hydraulic system to 150 or

220 bar using two fixed positions. Check the pressure needed for
the hydraulic equipment to be connected to the system and set
Complete
20170627 526
Bodywork
the pressure with the rotary control. The rotary control clicks
into the end positions and cannot be set to a position in between.
IMPORTANT!
Before connecting, always check that the system
pressure set does not exceed the maximum stated
pressure of the hydraulic equipment, to avoid
damaging the equipment.
EXT switch
EXT switch. Activate the switch when you need to

control some of the vehicle’s functions from outside
b361448
the vehicle.
EXT- the switch is a safety function which allows some of the

vehicle functions to be controlled from outside the vehicle.
Which functions you can control depend on the vehicle’s
equipment and which logic has been created in the vehicle’s
bodywork system.
When you press the EXT switch, the EXT symbol comes on in
the instrument cluster.
527 Complete
20170627
Bodywork
Operating the platform

Note:
In order to operate the platform, the vehicle’s
power take-off must be activated, see the section
Power take-offs.
! WARNING!
Before tipping, check that there are no people in

the working area.
IMPORTANT!
High engine speeds can cause damage to the
hydraulic cylinder and oil pump.
If the vehicle is driven when the platform is in the
tipping position, it should be driven with great
care. Otherwise the vehicle, platform and
hydraulics can easily be damaged, e.g. when
braking.
Use the switches below to operate the platform:
Complete
20170627 528
Bodywork
1 2 3 4 5
b361443
1. Emergency stop for tipper function. 4. Platform tipper on trailer up/down
2. Platform tipper up/down 5. Tailboard spreader on trailer
3. Tailboard spreader open/closed open/closed
Note:
Deactivate the power take-off and restart the
vehicle after an emergency stop to reset the
tipper functions.
1 2
1. Switch for tag axle lift on the first
axle of the trailer.
2. Switch for tag axle lift on the last
b361442
axle of the trailer.
Give a short press on the top part of the switch to raise the tag
axle. Give a short press on the bottom part of the switch to lower
the tag axle.
529 Complete
20170627
Bodywork
You can warm up the tipper body to prevent the vehicle’s load
from freezing. When the tipper body heating is on, the fuel
consumption may increase.
b361441
Tipper body heating switch.
The platform is equipped with a platform vibrator.
The platform vibrator shakes loose a frozen load. Only use the
platform vibrator for a few seconds at a time. The switch is
spring-loaded.
b361440
Platform vibrator switch.
Operating the platform

Note:
In order to operate the platform, the vehicle’s
power take-off must be activated, see the section
Power take-offs.
Complete
20170627 530
Bodywork
! WARNING!
Before tipping, check that there are no people in

the working area.
IMPORTANT!
High engine speeds can cause damage to the
hydraulic cylinder and oil pump.
If the vehicle is driven when the platform is in the
tipping position, it should be driven with great
care. Otherwise the vehicle, platform and
hydraulics can easily be damaged, e.g. when
braking.
531 Complete
20170627
Bodywork
Controls
1 2 3 4 5
b361443
1. Emergency stop for tipper functions 4. Platform tipper on trailer up/down
2. Platform tipper up/down 5. Tailboard spreader on trailer
3. Tailboard spreader open/closed open/closed
Note:
Deactivate the power take-off and restart the
vehicle after an emergency stop to reset the
tipper functions.
The lever for controlling the hydraulics is located by

b379268
the grab handle on the driver’s side.
The lever can be locked in the end position to keep the

hydraulics activated.
Complete
20170627 532
Bodywork
You can warm up the tipper body to prevent the vehicle’s load
from freezing. When the tipper body heating is on, the fuel
consumption may increase.
b361441
Tipper body heating switch.
The platform is equipped with a platform vibrator.
The platform vibrator shakes loose a frozen load. Only use the
platform vibrator for a few seconds at a time. The switch is
spring-loaded.
b361440
Platform vibrator switch.
Box truck bodywork

Before driving each day check that:
• The load is lashed correctly.
• The load lashes are in good condition.
• The tilt gate and all doors are closed.
533 Complete
20170627
Bodywork
Opening side doors
3
2
1
4
5
6
b365208
! WARNING!
There is a risk of trapping your hand when

securing the door assembly.
Complete
20170627 534
Bodywork
1 2 3
4 5 6
1 2
b209504
Proceed as follows to open the side doors:
1. Unlock and open door panel 1; position it against door
panel 2.
2. Secure it by fastening the loop in the hook.
3. Unlock door panel 3.
4. Open door panels 3 and 2.
5. Move the front door assembly completely to the side.
6. Secure the door assembly with the front side door

bracket.
7. Proceed in the same way with doors 4, 5 and 6.
535 Complete
20170627
Bodywork
Closing side doors
Proceed as follows to close the side doors:

1. Undo the lock on the rear side door bracket.
2. Lock door panel 6. Undo the loop from the hook.
3. Close and lock door panels 5 and 4.
4. Proceed in the same way with doors 1, 2 and 3.
Opening and closing the tilt gate

Open and close the tilt gate by pulling the strap. The gate held
open by the gas springs and secured in the closed position by the
rear end lift’s loading platform.
Securing loads
Secure all types of load according to the applicable regulations to
prevent the load from moving during transport.
IMPORTANT!
Load may only be put on the lashing rails in the
walls lengthwise.
Expander supports must not be used for securing
loads.
Complete
20170627 536
Bodywork
Secure the load by lashing it securely at the approved

attachment points:
• Rails in the walls.
• The floor’s external edges on the longitudes.
Load lashing equipment
The load lashing kit includes:
• 2 retaining straps
• 2 winches
• 1 ratchet handle
• 4 wheel chocks for floor lashing rail
537 Complete
20170627
Bodywork
Lash the load with the side doors open.
b365207
Only use a strap tensioner designed for your vehicle. b365206
Complete
20170627 538
Bodywork
The built-in lashing winches run along the side doors’ edge
profile.
Use the ratchet handle to tighten

b329198
the winches.
2
1. Rotate the winches’ support brace
outward.
1 2. Remove the winch from the edge
b329199
profile.
539 Complete
20170627
Oils and fluids
Oils and fluids

Engine oil
If you need to top up the engine oil in your vehicle, top up with
the same grade of oil as that used in the vehicle. The type of
engine oil in the vehicle is stated on the label by the filler pipe.
IMPORTANT!
Do not mix additives with the oil.
Contact a Scania workshop for more information about engine

oil and oil change intervals.
If it is not possible to read what is on the label, top up with:
• Scania LDF-4
Hydraulic oil
Oil grade
Only top up with oil of the following grade level:
• ISO 11158-HV
• DIN 51524-3-HVLP
• ISO 6743-4-HR/HV
• DIN 51502-HVLP
• AFNOR 48-603-HV
Complete
20170627 540
Oils and fluids
Checking and topping up engine oil

Note:
The vehicle should be on a level surface to
display the oil level correctly.
The warning symbol for high or low oil level
only comes on during start-up, not during
driving.
Note:
If you top up with too little oil, the system cannot
detect the filling. Do not top up with oil until the
oil level gets close to the minimum oil level mark.
b208581
The engine oil level is too high or too low.
Engine max to min**
9 litre engines Approximately 5 litres
13 litre engine Approximately 8 litres
16 litre engine Approximately 8 litres
541 Complete
20170627
Oils and fluids
* The difference between max. and min. on the oil dipstick and
in the instrument cluster.
If the instrument cluster and oil dipstick show different oil levels,
then prioritise as follows:
1. Display in instrument cluster
2. Oil dipstick
Show oil level

The engine oil level is only shown correctly if all the oil is in the
oil sump. It is therefore best to read the oil level in the
instrument cluster before starting the engine and driving off.
Proceed as follows to show the oil level in the instrument

cluster:
1. Turn the starter key to the drive position.
2. Press the OK button and select the Settings menu.
3. Then select Start-up check.
4. Select Show oil level. The oil level is indicated by a

horizontal bar.
Complete
20170627 542
Oils and fluids
Note:
If there is a fault in the oil level sensor, an error
message is displayed in the instrument cluster
informing that the sensor is defect.
The oil level is indicated by a

b358626
horizontal bar.
The current oil level is shown in the instrument cluster after you
switch on the voltage. The oil level is shown as long as the vehicle
is stationary, but for a maximum of 30 minutes after the engine
has been started.
If the oil needs to be topped-up, the amount to be filled is shown
in the instrument cluster.
View the oil level with the engine just switched off
If the engine has been running, the oil needs time to drain into
the oil sump before a correct value can be shown in the
instrument cluster. During the time the oil runs down, a message
is displayed together with the waiting time in the instrument
cluster. The waiting time depends on the temperature of the
engine when it was switched off. If the waiting time is more than
12 minutes, the instrument cluster shows: Please wait > 12 min.
543 Complete
20170627
Oils and fluids
In certain conditions, the waiting time can be long. For example,

if the engine has been started cold, run for a short time and
therefore has not reached normal operating temperature.
Display not available
The oil level cannot be displayed if the vehicle has been driven
or if the engine has been running for more than 30 minutes. A
message is then displayed in the instrument cluster. Switch off
the engine and wait until the oil has drained into the oil sump.
Oil dipstick
The oil dipstick is located at the front or by the fuel filter.
Wait for 8 minutes after the engine has stopped before checking
the oil level. Check the oil level using the oil dipstick. The oil
should not be below the lower mark or above the upper mark.
Note:
It is important to turn the oil dipstick so that it
goes down in the correct position.
Filling at the front

Move the side casing to one side to gain access to the oil dipstick
and filler pipe.
Complete
20170627 544
Oils and fluids
Oil dipstick and filler pipe at the

b376007
front.
Filling via the cylinder head

b376009
Power steering oil

b353252
the power steering fluid level is too low.
Fill with power steering fluid if the symbol is displayed in the

instrument cluster.
545 Complete
20170627
Oils and fluids
b353253
It is possible to check the level of the power steering fluid using

an oil dipstick. To access the oil dipstick, the cab needs to be
tilted.
Note:
Observe the utmost cleanliness. The power
steering gear is very sensitive to dirt.
The oil level should be between the lines on the oil dipstick when
the cover is pressed down as far as it will go on the reservoir. The
engine may be running or switched off.
IMPORTANT!
Only use recommended oil types.
Complete
20170627 546
Oils and fluids
Automatic chassis lubrication
Additional lubrication
Driving conditions determine the amount of lubricant to be
distributed. Difficult driving conditions require more
lubrication, i.e. the lubricating pump will run more often on such
a vehicle than on other vehicles e.g. long distance haulage.
Lubrication and pause times are factory settings and should not
be changed.
If the engine is switched off during a lubricating period, the
lubricating pump will stop and lubrication will be interrupted.
When you start the engine again, the lubricating period will be
completed.
If a much greater amount of lubricant is temporarily required,
you can start the pump manually; refer to step 8 under "Testing
the lubrication system". The normal pause time is not affected
when started manually.
547 Complete
20170627
Oils and fluids
Testing the lubrication system

Steps 1-4 apply if the system is completely empty.
b203090
1. Fill the system by undoing the hose to the pump outlet

union; refer to arrow in illustration. Connect a grease
gun to the hose and fill the system.
b203091
2. Check that the indicator pin is moving. The indicator

pin is located on the right-hand side of the main
distributor block.
3. Fill until the lubricant exudes from the various

lubrication points in the chassis.
Complete
20170627 548
Oils and fluids
4. Stop filling.
b203092
5. Connect the grease gun to the filler nipple on the

lubricant reservoir.
6. Fill the reservoir with lubricant.
7. Disconnect the grease gun.

b203093
549 Complete
20170627
Oils and fluids
8. Start the pump manually by turning the starter key to

the drive position and pressing the button behind the
plastic cover on the housing under the reservoir.
9. The pump will start. Walk around the chassis and

inspect for leaks.
10. Conduct a road test and make sure none of the hoses are
damaged at their end positions for the moving parts.
Lubricate the universal joint and slide joint with a grease
gun.
AdBlue
Note:
When AdBlue runs out, the level of nitrogen
oxides will be higher than intended. This may
violate national legislation which could mean that
the requirements for national tax and duty relief
will not be met. Comply with national
legislation.
AdBlue may have another brand name in your region. The

following brand names correspond to AdBlue: AUS 32, ARLA
32, Air1 and DEF.
Follow the instructions in this section carefully. If you make a
mistake when refuelling, important parts of the fuel system or
emission control system will be damaged.
Complete
20170627 550
Oils and fluids
The vehicle is equipped with emission control technology, SCR,

which reduces the amount of nitrogen oxides in the exhaust
gases. Ensure that the SCR system remains functional by
topping up AdBlue regularly.
Vehicles equipped with SCR produce a cloud of white steam
when they are started. This happens most often when starting a
cold engine in cold conditions, but can also occur under other
conditions. The steam cloud consists of water vapour and is
formed because the catalytic converter absorbs water. This is
normal, and the steam disappears when the engine is under load.
The steam cloud is no more harmful to health than normal
exhaust fumes, but bear in mind that it could reduce visibility for
other road users.
Normal AdBlue consumption is 2-12% of the fuel consumption.
However, higher consumption is not abnormal. When using a
power take-off, for example, the consumption is higher than
when driving on public roads.
For more information on emission control, refer to the section
551 Complete
20170627
Oils and fluids
Filling with AdBlue
IMPORTANT!
The SCR system will stop working if diesel gets
into the AdBlue tank.
The diesel fuel system will stop working if
AdBlue gets into the diesel tank.
Clean the tanks immediately if AdBlue and diesel
have become mixed.
Top up AdBlue in the reductant tank. Always check the amount

of AdBlue when you fill up with fuel. You can check the amount
of AdBlue in the menu on the instrument cluster, Instantaneous
data.
Bear in mind the following when filling AdBlue:
• Clean on and around the filler cap before you open it so
that no water or dirt can enter the reductant tank.
• The AdBlue liquid must comply with standards DIN

70070 or ISO 22241.
• AdBlue must not be diluted with water. The SCR system

will stop working if this happens and fuel consumption
may increase.
• AdBlue freezes at -11°C. Do not fill the reductant tank to

the top because the tank could crack.
Complete
20170627 552
Oils and fluids
• The filler nozzle for filling with AdBlue only fits the
reductant tank.
• Help protect the environment! Avoid spillage and use a

suitable container.
Display messages
b374072
Symbol for AdBlue information.
When AdBlue is about to run out, the following AdBlue symbol

is displayed in the instrument cluster. Top up with AdBlue as
soon as possible. Pay attention to the messages in the instrument
cluster display.
Display messages
b374137
Symbol for AdBlue emission control information.

If the symbol is lit up white, the SCR system is being evaluated.
One example is after you filled AdBlue after receiving a warning
for low AdBlue level.
553 Complete
20170627
Oils and fluids
A symbol lit yellow is a warning that the AdBlue level in the

AdBlue tank is low or there is a fault in the SCR system. Pay
attention to the messages in the instrument cluster display.
Top up AdBlue or repair the SCR system to prevent power and
speed limitations.
Stopping the engine
IMPORTANT!
Always wait for at least 1.5 minutes after
switching off the ignition with the starter key
before switching off the battery master switch.
symbol for the exhaust gas aftertreatment is
displayed.
Symbol shown while the aftertreatment system is

b374136
working.
When you switch off the engine, the SCR system undergoes
aftertreatment, which continues even after you switch off the
ignition with the starter key. During SCR system aftertreatment,
the symbol is shown to indicate that the aftertreatment system is
working. Aftertreatment is necessary to protect the SCR system.
The SCR system could be damaged if you switch off the battery
master switch while the aftertreatment system is shown.
Complete
20170627 554
Oils and fluids
Stopping the engine
IMPORTANT!
symbol for the exhaust gas aftertreatment system
is displayed.
Symbol displayed when the exhaust gas

b374136
aftertreatment system is working.
When you switch off the engine, the SCR system undergoes
aftertreatment, which continues even after you switch off the
ignition with the starter key. During SCR system aftertreatment,
the symbol is shown to indicate that the aftertreatment system is
working. Aftertreatment is necessary to protect the SCR system.
The SCR system could be damaged if you switch off the battery
master switch while the aftertreatment system is shown.
Handling AdBlue
AdBlue reductant is non-toxic, but you should bear in mind the
following:
• At temperatures above 55ºC, AdBlue emits ammonia gas
at levels that are hazardous to health. Do not breathe in
ammonia gas.
555 Complete
20170627
Oils and fluids
• Avoid spillage. Rinse off or flush with water if you spill

AdBlue. If spilled, AdBlue can form white deposits and
could cause corrosion if it comes into contact with
certain metals and material.
• Cleanliness when handling AdBlue is extremely

important since the SCR catalytic converter could be
seriously damaged if there are contaminants in AdBlue.
• Avoid exposing AdBlue to sunlight as this could cause

algae growth in the AdBlue tank.
General AdBlue properties:

• AdBlue freezes at -11ºC.
• AdBlue has a shelf life of 12 months from the date of

manufacture if stored at temperature below 30ºC.
Filling clutch fluid
Activating the service mode

To access the clutch fluid reservoirs, the service mode must be
activated:
1. Switch off the power in the vehicle.
2. Hold in the button on the end of the windscreen wiper

lever and switch on the power again. The wiper blades
are then angled upwards.
Complete
20170627 556
Oils and fluids
When the filling of clutch fluid is done: press in the button on

the end of the windscreen wiper lever again to deactivate service
mode.
Remove the front panel
1. Loosen the hexagon screw with an

Allen key.
2. Grip the panel with both hands,
push it upwards and place it to one
b374917
side.
Note:
When the panel is put back, make sure all the
panel clamps hook in properly before refitting
the hexagon screw.
IMPORTANT!
Clean the reservoir externally before topping it
up. Do not remove the strainer when topping up.
Risk of leaks due to contamination.
557 Complete
20170627
Oils and fluids
You should swing out the

reservoir before topping up with
b202105
clutch fluid
IMPORTANT!
Wipe off any spillage on the paintwork
immediately. Otherwise there is a risk of
permanent damage.
Environment
Complete
20170627 558
Oils and fluids
Check that the fluid level is

between the marks on the
b202106
reservoir.
Fluid grade
SAE J 1703 (DOT 3 or 4 Brake Fluid).
! WARNING!
The fluid is harmful if ingested. Avoid contact

with the skin. Wear protective gloves and
goggles.
Coolant
IMPORTANT!
Check before driving - when the coolant is cold -
that the coolant level is above the lowest level.
559 Complete
20170627
Oils and fluids
High coolant temperature

b374063
If the coolant becomes too hot while driving, i.e. a warning

symbol is displayed and the coolant temperature gauge needle is
in the red area, you should proceed as follows:
2. Set full heating in the vehicle, set maximum speed for

the fan and run the engine at idling.
3. Once the coolant temperature has dropped, the vehicle

should be driven with care to the nearest Scania
workshop.
Meanwhile, keep an eye on the coolant temperature to avoid

overheating the engine.
Filling coolant
! WARNING!
Use protective gloves as coolant can cause

irritation if it comes in contact with the skin.
Complete
20170627 560
Oils and fluids
A correct mixture of coolant has the following properties:

• Corrosion inhibitor
• Antifreeze
• High boiling point
Therefore, it is important to use only approved products in the

cooling system.
IMPORTANT!
Only the product Scania antifreeze glycol, or
other products tested to provide proper antifreeze
and protection against corrosion for Scania, may
be used in Scania engines. Products that do not
satisfy the requirements for use in a Scania engine
can result in faults in and damage to the cooling
system. This can lead to the invalidation of
Scania’s warranty for faults and damage caused by
the use of inappropriate coolant.
IMPORTANT!
Top up with coolant from below if the expansion
tank is empty. Contact a Scania workshop since
special equipment is required.
561 Complete
20170627
Oils and fluids
b356886
Always mix the coolant before topping up the cooling system.
The coolant should consist of the following:

• Water
• 35-60% of Scania antifreeze glycol
Even though the level of antifreeze is sufficient to prevent ice

forming in the coolant, circulation problems may still arise. This
is because the coolant becomes more viscous when the
temperature falls below the coolant freezing point.
The content of antifreeze shown in the table must be used in the

coolant in order to avoid circulation problems in the cooling
system.
Complete
20170627 562
Oils and fluids
Lowest -16°C -25°C -38°C -55°C

temperatu
re
% by 35% 40% 50% 60%

volume of
antifreeze
Changing the coolant

The coolant should be changed at a Scania workshop.
Note:
Coolant is hazardous to the environment.
Comply with national legislation for handling
left over and discarded coolant.
Topping up with coolant when

expansion tank is empty
If you discover the expansion tank is empty while driving. Top
up the expansion tank with coolant and have a check done at a
Scania workshop.
563 Complete
20170627
Oils and fluids
Washer fluid
b353984
Topping up the washer fluid
Complete
20170627 564
Fuels
Fuels
Fuel, biodiesel
Quality requirements for biodiesel

The quality of the fuel is important to engine operation, service
life and performance. Biodiesel must comply with the
requirements of standard EN 14214.
Your vehicle is prepared for driving on up to 100% biodiesel EN
14214.
For a number of reasons, it is not possible to use 100% of the fuel
in the tank. For example, the fuel pick-up unit must never suck
air into the engine. For this reason, there must always be fuel left
in the tank, even if the gauge shows 0%. The shape of the fuel
tank, the location of the filler flap and equipment in the tank also
affect the amount of fuel that can be used. This means that it is
not possible to top up with the maximum volume of the tank.
There must also be room for the fuel to expand, e.g. due to
temperature differences.
During extended stoppages, the fuel tank should be drained of
biodiesel and completely filled with diesel since this reduces the
risk of condensation forming in the fuel tank. This also prevents
the biodiesel from becoming too old.
The maximum storage period for biodiesel is 6 months from the
date of manufacture.
565 Complete
20170627
Fuels
! WARNING!
Biodiesel is harmful to the skin and eyes. Wear

protective gloves and goggles when handling
diesel.
! WARNING!
At temperatures above +38°C biodiesel can auto-

ignite if it is mixed with flammable materials.
IMPORTANT!
Clean around the filler cap before opening it so
that no water or dirt can enter the fuel tank. The
fuel system can suffer serious damage if dirt enters
it.
Complete
20170627 566
Fuels
IMPORTANT!
Special measures are necessary when changing to
biodiesel after use of diesel. Contact a Scania
workshop. When changing from diesel to
biodiesel, special measures are required. Contact
a Scania workshop.
Note:
If the vehicle has two tanks, fill the tank with the
fuel pick-up unit first. It is this tank which the
pump draws from. Fill the tank completely to
keep air out of the connecting line to the other
tank.
Biodiesel at low temperatures

Biodiesel is adapted for use in the specific climate of each
country. If you are going to drive the vehicle to a zone that is
colder than the one in which you refuelled, make sure that the
fuel can handle the lower temperature.
At low temperatures, wax-like precipitation occurs in the
biodiesel. When this occurs, there is a risk of the fuel filter
becoming blocked and the engine losing power, stopping or
being unable to start. The wax-like precipitation normally lies at
567 Complete
20170627
Fuels
the bottom of the fuel tank and remains even if the biodiesel is
heated.
Problems with wax-like precipitation could start at +5°C. Ask
your fuel supplier about what applies to the fuel you are using.
Scania recommends switching to diesel that complies with
standard EN 590 when temperatures are about +/- 0°C. Use a
fuel heater to improve start properties. Mixing in diesel EN 590
also improves cold-start properties.
If you are suddenly caught up in the cold and are uncertain
whether the fuel in your tank can handle the climate, you should
park in a warm garage. An emergency measure is to avoid turning
off the engine.
Always use a fuel heater if you are unsure about the fuel’s
properties in the temperature in question.
IMPORTANT!
Mixing kerosene or the like with fuel is not
permitted as the injection equipment may fail.
Fuel heater
Fuel heaters prevent the fuel filter from becoming blocked by
paraffin wax at low temperatures. The risk occurs if you use fuel
designated for higher temperatures than where you are. The fuel
heater can increase the fuel temperature by around 5°C. This is
not enough if the tank is full of diesel classified for higher
temperatures than where you are. The fuel heater cannot
dissolve paraffin that has already formed on the filter. If the filter
Complete
20170627 568
Fuels
is blocked with paraffin, it must be renewed in order to start the

engine.
Your vehicle is equipped with a thermostat-controlled fuel

heater. The fuel heater is started and switched off when required.
It is not possible to control the fuel heater manually.
heater cannot dissolve paraffin that has already formed on the
filter. If the filter is blocked with paraffin, it must be renewed in
order to start the engine.
heater can increase the fuel temperature by around 5°C. This is
not enough if the tank is full of diesel classified for higher
temperatures than where you are. The fuel heater cannot
dissolve paraffin that has already formed on the filter. If the filter
is blocked with paraffin, it must be renewed in order to start the
engine.
The switch has three positions:
• In the upper position, the fuel heater is completely

switched off.
• In the centre position, the fuel heater is activated, as long

as the engine is running and the alternator is providing
charge.
569 Complete
20170627
Fuels
• In the lower position, the fuel heater only runs on the

batteries. This position is spring-loaded.
The lamp in the switch is lit when the fuel heater is

b358727
active.
Proceed as follows before starting the engine:

1. Activate the main power supply
2. Keep the lower part of the switch depressed for about 60

seconds to preheat the fuel
3. Starting the engine
4. Press the upper part of the switch to continue heating

the fuel
If the engine loses power during driving:
• Set the switch to the centre position
The fuel system

The fuel system works under high fuel pressure. The fuel system
is therefore susceptible to damage since it could lead to fuel
leakage.
Poor-quality fuel may contain particles that create problems in
the fuel system and shorten the service life of parts such as the
Complete
20170627 570
Fuels
fuel filter. Poor-quality fuel may also contain water, which can
cause corrosion.
Since the fuel system is also extremely sensitive to
contamination, all operations in the system, such as fuel filter
renewal, should be carried out by a Scania workshop.
Raised idling speed

If the engine runs at a low load for an extended period of time,
the filter is heated automatically. The heating causes an increase
in the idling speed. The function is called periodic hydrocarbon
evaporation and is used to prevent damage to the particulate
filter and the oxidation catalytic converter.
Actions
• Complete – to prevent damage to the vehicle, the
function should be allowed to run to completion, which
takes about 15-30 minutes. You do not have to do
anything. The function will run and end automatically.
• Cancel – release the parking brake or engage a gear to

cancel the function.
• Prevent – it is possible to prevent the need to run the

function. This is done by warming up the vehicle before
the next extended period of idling. Approximately 10
minutes of driving, e.g. on a motorway, is sufficient.
571 Complete
20170627
Fuels
Bleed the fuel system

The fuel system needs to be bled when the tank has been run dry
or when work is being carried out on the fuel system.
It is important that you use the starter motor according to the
following instructions. The starter motor can be damaged if you
do not follow the instructions.
IMPORTANT!
To move the vehicle a short distance in an
emergency, the starter motor can be run for a
maximum of 35 seconds. This is only possible for
a vehicle with a manual gearbox which also
includes fully automated Opticruise.
IMPORTANT!
When venting is complete: Do not run the starter
motor for more than 30 seconds during each start
attempt. If the engine has not started after 2
attempts, troubleshoot for a fault. The starter
motor must rest for at least 5 minutes before the
next start attempt.
Complete
20170627 572
Fuels
PDE unit injector
b201170
Environment
Proceed as follows to bleed the fuel system:

1. Attach a clear plastic hose to the bleed nipple on the fuel
filter housing.
573 Complete
20170627
Fuels
2. Open the bleed nipple and pump with the hand pump
until fuel comes out of the hose without air bubbles
(approx. 100 pump strokes).
3. Close the bleed nipple and remove the hose.

b201169
4. Transfer the plastic hose to the fuel manifold bleed

nipple.
5. Open the fuel manifold ventilating valve.
6. Pump with the hand pump until fuel comes out without
air bubbles (approximately 50 strokes).
7. Close the bleed nipple on the fuel manifold and remove

the plastic hose.
Complete
20170627 574
Fuels
8. Pump until the overflow valve opens (a hissing sound

will be heard).
9. Start the engine. The engine should be easy to start.
PDE unit injector b201170
Environment
575 Complete
20170627
Fuels

filter housing.
until fuel comes out of the hose without air bubbles
(approx. 200 pump strokes).

will be heard).
5. Start the engine. The engine should be easy to start.
Complete
20170627 576
Fuels
Scania HPI
b201170
Environment

filter housing.
577 Complete
20170627
Fuels
2. Open the bleed nipple and crank with the starter motor
until the fuel system is purged free of air. The pumping
takes a maximum of 20 seconds.
4. Start the engine and check for leaks.
5. Leave the engine idling for 2 minutes. While the engine

is still running, bleed the system again by opening and
closing the bleed nipple.
16 litre engine
b201171
Environment
Complete
20170627 578
Fuels

filter housing.
until fuel comes out of the hose without air bubbles.
This may take around 100 pump strokes.

will be heard).
5. Start the engine and check for leaks.
If the engine is difficult to start, repeat steps 2-5 a few times.
XPI unit injector
! WARNING!
The fuel system has a very high pressure, up to

3,000 bar. Do not go near an engine that is
running as a jet of fuel that comes into contact
with the skin can cause life-threatening injuries!
579 Complete
20170627
Fuels
Environment
2 1
b207874
1. Bleed nipple 2. Hand pump
Complete
20170627 580
Fuels
1. Bleed nipple 2. Hand pump b170167
1. Attach a clear plastic hose to the bleed nipple. Place the

end of the plastic hose in a container that holds at least 3
litres.
2. Loosen the hand pump handle.
3. Open the bleed nipple.
4. Hand pump until the fuel comes out of the hose. This
may take 200 strokes of the pump.
5. Close the bleed nipple.
6. Start the engine and open the bleed nipple carefully.
581 Complete
20170627
Fuels
7. Check that the fuel coming out contains no air bubbles;

approximately 3 litres may need to go into the container
before the air has gone.
8. Close the bleed nipple, remove the hose and tighten the
hand pump handle.
If the engine is difficult to start, repeat steps 4-7 a few times.
Contaminants in the fuel
Water or micro-organisms
Small amounts of water are permitted in fuel. Max. 0.02% is
permitted for diesel (EN 590) and max. 0.05% is permitted for
biodiesel (EN 14214). These amounts of water do not affect
engine function. Prolonged and improper fuel storage can result
in more water collecting. If these larger amounts of water enter
the engine, it will be damaged.
To check if there is water in the fuel, shine a light into the tank
using a flash light. The water in the fuel will appear like silvery
bubbles or floe. Since water is heavier than diesel, the water
collects at the bottom of the tank.
If you have so much water in the tank that floe forms, you should
visit the workshop for decontamination. If water is so high that
it is close to the fuel pick-up unit’s inlet, request towing to a
Scania workshop for decontamination.
Complete
20170627 582
Fuels
Micro-organisms can grow in the interface between water and

fuel. They can lead to a brown or black slimy film and discolour
the fuel.
Water and micro-organisms can block the fuel filter so that the
engine runs unevenly or stops. They can also pass the filter and
form damaging coatings on different parts of the injection
system.
In the event of contamination
IMPORTANT!
Fuel additives can contain substances that are
dangerous to the environment and health. Take
care to follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
handling and dosing.
If the vehicle fuel system is contaminated, it must be completely

cleaned from fuel and water. The tanks must be drained and
cleaned, mechanically and by steam/high-pressure washing, and
then dried. Lines and other components in the fuel system must
be flushed and blown dry. It is important that no fluid is left in
the system after cleaning.
Always renew fuel filters. In the event of serious or long term
infection the components of the fuel system may also need to be
renewed.
583 Complete
20170627
Fuels
Locate the source of the infection. Establish and rectify the cause
of the contamination so that the infection does not recur. It is
usually fuel that has been stored for a long time, with little
movement and without draining of the condensation. For
example in a container, barrel or auxiliary tank.
When the fuel system has been thoroughly cleaned, an anti-
bacterial agent can be added at the first refuelling in order to
ensure successful cleaning. Continuous use can damage the fuel
system and is not recommended.
Complete
20170627 584
Technical data
Technical data
Type plate
Engine type plate
1 Made by 2
123 45XX
Typ/Type DC 13 06
Variant
Motor/Engine No
1. Engine type and engine serial

4 number
Valve clearance cold engine
2. Stamped engine serial number
3 Inlet
Outlet
: 0.45 mm
: 0.70 mm
o
Pump timing :
after T.D.C.
3. Smoke values
b208295
B: 0.75
A : DC 1306
4. Valve clearance
Pressure in brake system

Regular inspection values.
585 Complete
20170627
Technical data
Component or system Pressure
Compressor and pressure Maximum relief pressure is

regulator 12.5 bar
Compressor and pressure Maximum charge pressure is

regulator 10.0 bar
Four-circuit protection valve Static closing pressure is 4.5

bar
Trailer relay valve Output pressure at a service

pressure of 1.5 bar is between
1.5 and 1.8 bar*
Brake system Minimum operating pressure

is 9.0 bar
*Does not apply to vehicles with EBS.
Tyre pressure
General information about tyre pressure

• Always adjust tyre pressure to the axle weight. Incorrect
tyre pressure leads to greater tyre wear and can cause a
significant deterioration in road handling.
• Higher loads and higher speeds causes an increase in tyre

temperature. This, in turn, increases tyre pressure.
Complete
20170627 586
Technical data
• Too low tyre pressure causes an increased fuel

consumption, increased tyre wear, risk of overheating
and can damage the tyre carcass.
• A tyre that has been overheated and has a damaged tyre

carcass is dangerous to use and can explode.
• Follow local legislation and the instructions of the tyre

manufacturer. The tables should be seen as a guide.
The tables show tyre pressure in bar at different axle weights.

Axle weight and max. pressure are given in thousands of kg. The
values in the table apply to cold radial tyres.
IMPORTANT!
The tyre pressure changes approximately 0.2 bar
per 10°C. This should be taken into account when
checking tyre pressure indoors, particularly at low
temperatures.
Example: If the indoor temperature is 20°C and the outdoor

temperature is 0°C, the correct tyre pressure is the prescribed
pressure plus 0.4 bar.
587 Complete
20170627
Technical data
Note:
The vehicle and tyres are correctly matched on
delivery. Changing to a different tyre dimension
can alter the overall gear ratio of the vehicle.
This means that the tachograph must be reset.
Contact a Scania workshop.
Single tyres
A B C D
5 6,3 6,5 6,7 7,1 7,5 8 9 9,5 10 10,5 11 11,5
455/45 R 22.5 * 5,0 5,0 5,0 5,25 5,5 6,0 6,5 7,5 8,0 8,5 9,0 10,5
9,0
495/45 R 22.5 * 5,0 5,0 5,0 5,0 5,0 5,25 5,75 6,5 7,2 7,7 8,0 8,5 9,0 11,6 9,0
355/50 R 22.5 154 5,5 7,25 7,5 8,0 8,5 9,0 7,5 9,0
355/50 R 22.5 156 5,5 7,0 7,25 7,5 8,0 8,5 9,0 8,0
9,0
375/50 R 22.5 5,0 6,75 7,0 7,25 7,75 8,25 9,0 8,0 9,0
295/55 R 22.5 7,0 9,0 6,1
9,0
295/60 R 22.5 6,5 8,5 8,75 9,0 6,7 9,0
315/60 R 22.5 152 6,25 8,0 8,25 8,5 9,0 7,1 9,0
315/60 R 22.5 154 6,25 7,5 7,75 5,75 8,0 8,5 9,0 7,5 9,0
275/70 R 22.5 7,0 9,0 6,3 9,0
305/70 R 22.5 6,0 8,0 8,25 8,5 9,0 7,1 9,0
315/70 R 22.5 154 5,75 7,5 7,75 8,0 8,5 9,0 7,5 9,0
315/70 R 22.5 156 5,75 7,0 7,25 7,5 8,0 8,5 9,0 8,0 9,0
275/80 R 22.5 6,5 8,25 8,5 6,5 8,5
295/80 R 22.5 152 5,75 7,5 7,75 8,0 8,5 7,1 8,5
295/80 R 22.5 154 5,75 7,0 7,25 7,5 8,0 8,5 7,1 8,5
b341355
315/80 R 22.5 5,0 6,5 6,75 7,0 7,5 8,0 8,5 8,0 8,5
A = Tyre type, B = Load index, C = Axle weight, D = Maximum axle weight at

number of bar *Single mounting on driving axle
Complete
20170627 588
Technical data
A B C D
5 6,3 6,5 6,7 7,1 7,5 8 9 9,5 10 10,5 11 11,5
11 R 22.5 7,0 8,0 6,3 8,0

12 R 22.5 5,75 7,5 7,75 8,0 8,5 7,1 8,5
13 R 22.5 5,0 6,25 6,75 7,0 7,5 8,0 8,5 8,0 8,5
11.00 R 22 5,25 7,0 7,25 7,6 8,25 7,1 8,25
12.00 R 20 5,25 7,0 7,25 7,5 8,0 8,5 7,5 8,5
12.00 R 24 5,0 5,75 6,0 6,25 6,5 7,0 7,5 8,5 9,0 8,5
305/75 R 24.5 5,25 7,0 7,25 7,5 8,0 8,5 7,5 8,5
325/95 R 24 5,0 5,5 5,7 6,0 6,2 6,5 7,0 8,0 8,5 9,5 8,5
385/55 R 22.5 5,0 6,0 6,25 6,5 7,0 7,5 8,0 9,0 9,0 9,0
385/65 R 22.5 160 5,0 6,0 6,25 6,5 7,0 7,5 8,0 9,0 9,0 9,0
385/65 R 22.5 164 5,0 5,0 5,25 5,5 5,75 6,25 7,0 8,0 8,5 9,0 10,0 9,0
b387319
375/90 R 22.5 164 3,4 4,7 5,0 5,25 5,5 5,9 6,8 7,25 7,6 10,0 7,6
A = Tyre type, B= Load index, C = Axle weight, D = Maximum axle weight at

number of bar
589 Complete
20170627
Technical data
Twin tyres
A B C D
7 8 9 10 11 11,5 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
315/45 R 22.5 5,0 5,8 6,6 7,5 8,5 9,0 11,6

9,0
295/55 R 22.5 5,0 5,8 6,6 7,5 8,5 9,0 11,6
9,0
295/60 R 22.5 5,0 5,6 6,5 7,25 8,0 8,5 9,0 12,3 9,0
315/60 R 22.5 148 5,0 5,1 6,0 6,0 7,5 7,75 8,25 12,6 8,5
315/60 R 22.5 150 5,0 5,0 5,75 6,25 6,75 7,5 7,75 8,25 13,4 8,5
275/70 R 22.5 5,1 6,0 6,8 7,65 8,6 9,0 11,6 9,0
305/70 R 22.5 5,0 5,5 6,2 6,9 7,8 8,25 8,7 12,6 9,0
315/70 R 22.5 5,0 5,1 5,8 6,65 7,3 7,75 8,0 8,75 13,4 9,0
275/80 R 22.5 5,0 5,4 6,2 6,9 7,7 8,25 8,6 12,0 8,5
295/80 R 22.5 148 5,0 5,1 5,9 6,75 7,4 7,75 8,1 12,6 8,5
295/80 R 22.5 149 5,0 5,1 5,5 6,0 7,0 7,25 7,75 8,5 13,0 8,5
315/80 R 22.5 5,0 5,0 5,0 6,0 6,5 6,75 7,1 7,75 13,4 8,0
11 R 22.5 5,0 5,3 6,1 6,8 7,7 8,0 11,6 8,0
12 R 22.5 5,0 5,1 5,9 6,7 7,3 7,75 8,2 12,6 8,5
13 R 22.5 5,0 5,0 5,2 5,8 6,5 7,75 7,65 8,25 13,4 8,5
305/75 R 24.5 5,0 5,0 5,5 6,25 7,0 7,4 7,25 8,5 13,0 8,5
11.00 R 22 5,0 5,0 5,4 5,5 6,5 7,0 7,25 12,0 7,25
12.00 R 20 5,0 5,0 5,5 6,0 6,7 7,0 7,6 8,5 13,4 8,5
12.00 R 24 5,0 5,0 5,0 5,0 5,5 5,75 6,0 6,6 7,25 7,9 8,5 16,0 8,5
b387318
325/95 R 24 5,0 5,0 5,0 5,0 5,0 5,0 5,1 5,7 6,1 6,5 7,0 7,5 8,0 18,0 8,5
A = Tyre type, B= Load index, C = Axle weight, D = Maximum axle weight at

number of bar
Complete
20170627 590
Technical data
Tyre pressure for special-purpose vehicles
Single tyres
A B
7000 8000 9000
A = Tyre type, B = Axle weight in
b213717
14.00 R 20 4,8 5,8 6,5 kg and air pressure in bar
Twin tyres
A B
5000 10000 12000 14000 16000 18000
b213718
14.00 R 20 2,1 4,2 5 5,8 6,7 7,5
A = Tyre type, B = Axle weight in kg and air pressure in bar
591 Complete
20170627
Index
A Battery master switch 503

ABS 290 Bleed the fuel system 572
Acceleration control 161 Bodybuilding and
conversions 524
Accessories 158
Box truck bodywork 533
Adaptive battery charging 507
Adaptive cruise control 173
C
Adaptive idling 195
Cab tilting 382
AdBlue 550
Calibrating the distance
Adjusting the collapsible
sensor 183
gear lever in the cab 109
Central locking 315
Admonitions in the
Driver’s Manual 1 Central locking and alarm 319
AEB 167 Changing wheels 432
Air horn 137 Chassis lifting points 462
Air suspension 196 Check points 375
Airbag 8 Check the brake system
for leaks 378
Alternative vehicle levels 198
Checking and topping up
App for the remote
engine oil 541
control of auxiliary heater 155
Checking brake chamber
Automatic chassis
stroke length 379
lubrication 547
Checking nitrogen oxides 23
Automatic neutral
position 290 Climate system 127
Auxiliary heater 143 Clutch monitoring 239
Axle weight regulation, tag Collapsible gear lever 240
axle 205 Compressed air, trailer
connection 357
B Contaminants in the fuel 582
Batteries 493, 500 Coolant 559
Battery charger 506 Cruise control 162
Complete
2017-06-27 592
Index
Cruise control with active Emergency exit 441

prediction 163 Emergency kit 442
Engine air cleaner 402
D Engine oil 540
Danger of fire and Ergonomics 110
explosion 3
ESP 223
Detaching the propeller
shaft 453 EST 229
Differential lock 217 EXT switch 527
Direction indicator and Exhaust brake 268

wiper lever 105 Extendable ladder 118
Disc brake 416 External cleaning 421
Downhill speed control 275 External ladder 390
Downhill speed control
with offset 277 F
Draining the compressed Feedback to Scania 1
air tanks 414 Fifth wheel 358, 362, 366, 369
Drive wheel Filler nipple for parking
disengagement 221 brake circuit 465
Driving time and rest time Filling clutch fluid 556
support 97
Fixed bed 118
Fixed seat 112
E
Folding seat 116
EBS 292
Front grille panel 382
Economical driving 17
Fuel heater 568
Eco-roll 165
Fuel, biodiesel 565
ED power take-off 523
Fuses and relays 467
EG power take-off 518
EK power take-off 522
G
Electric heater 156
Gear changing 231
Electrical socket in cab 127
593 Complete
2017-06-27
Index
H L
Hand throttle 159 Lane departure warning
Handling hazardous (LDW) 184
substances 26 Lighting in the cab 301
Heated windscreen 141 Load transfer 201
Hill hold 286 Low gear in transfer box 220
Hill start assistance 288
Hour counter 101 M
Hydraulic oil 540 Maintenance programme 380
Manual level control 212
I Menus in the Display 32
ID button 88
Idling speed adjustment 193 O
Immobiliser 331 Operating the platform 528, 530
Indicator lamps and Operation unit for air
symbols 36 suspension 207
Instrument cluster 29 Opticruise 240, 253
Interlock valve 285 Outer storage
Internal cleaning 419 compartments 158
Isocyanates 26
IVD 90
P
Parking brake 279
J Power steering oil 545
Jump socket 516 Pressure in brake system 585
Jump starting 508, 511
R
K Radiator blind 408
Kick-down 161 Radio 333
Kitchen module 121 Raised idling speed 571
Read this first 1
Complete
2017-06-27 594
Index
Rear view mirror heating 140 drive 215

Rear view mirrors and Shunting 452
window winders 138 Smoke detector 12
Reclining seat 117 Snow protection air intake 406
Regeneration of the Sound level control for
particulate filter 411 reverse alarm 137
Release the parking brake Standard lighting 297
without compressed air 459
Starter lock 329
Remote control for
Steering wheel 102
auxiliary heater 151
Renewing a bulb 391
T
Retarder 272
Tachograph 80, 86
Roof air deflector 15
Tag axle lift 199
Roof hatch 142, 143
Tail lift 348
Rotating beacon 314
The fuel system 570
S Tool kit 380

Topping up with coolant
Safety belt 4
when expansion tank is
Safety during vehicle empty 563
maintenance 3
Touching up paintwork 438
Safety regulations for fire
Towing and recovery 442
extinguisher 10
Towing unit 349
Scania Driver Support 187
Traction Control (TC) 225
Scania Euro 6 26
Trailer brake 283
Seat heating 117
Trailer socket 351, 355
Seat, basic 113
TV preparation 125
Seat, middle 114
Type plate 585
Seat, premium 115
Tyre pressure 586
Securing the vehicle on a
ferry 373 Tyre pressure monitoring 92
Selectable front wheel Tyres and rims 425
595 Complete
2017-06-27
Index
U
Upper bed 119
W
Warning triangle 442
Washer fluid 564
Water separating fuel
filter 403
Waxing and polishing 439
Wet kit 526
Wheel chocks 439
White smoke limiter 25
Wiper blade 402
Wireless download for the
tachograph 86
Complete
2017-06-27 596
Index
*00000000ENGB*
Complete 1 en-GB serie6
Complete
2017-06-27 597

Driver Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Driver Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Complete

Open source (Open Source Notice)

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICA-

11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO

12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs

<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989 Ty Coon, President of Vice

Model / FCC ID: L2C0051TR IC: 3432A-0051TR

Refer to www.scania.com/radio-type-approval-information for additional information.

SIMPLIFIED EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

About the Driver’s Manual .............................................1

Instrument for vehicle information..............................29

Tyre pressure monitoring ...........................................................92

Driver environment .....................................................102

App for the remote control of auxiliary heater.........................155

Driver assistance system ..............................................159

Low gear in transfer box ...........................................................220

Gear changing and braking ........................................231

Locks and alarm ...........................................................315

Central locking and alarm.........................................................319

Loading and unloading...............................................348

Wiper blade ...............................................................................402

Battery charger ..........................................................................506

Oils and fluids ..............................................................540

The fuel system .........................................................................570

About the Driver’s Manual

Admonitions in the Driver’s Manual

This caption is used when there is a risk of

Danger of fire and explosion

To reduce the risk of injury in a collision, the

Safety belt and child car seat

A child must always wear its own safety belt.

• Children shorter than 135 cm must use a car seat.

Seat belts and pregnancy

• The shoulder strap must go over the chest. It must not be

If the seatbelt is not fastened correctly, sudden

To increase the protection for the driver, the safety belt is

After the collision

The safety belt, belt pretensioner and other

Scania recommends renewing all component parts of the safety

Belt pretensioners must be disposed of in a safe

Symbols in the instrument cluster

The symbol may be displayed if the belt pretensioner has been

In particular, it is important to wear the safety

Airbag in steering wheel

The crash safety system detects

deploys the airbag.

Equipment must not be fitted to the inner roof of

Symbols in the instrument cluster

A yellow symbol comes on if a fault has occurred in the system.

Safety regulations for fire

• Do not aim the jet of extinguishing medium directly at

• Only skilled service technicians trained in accordance

• The fire extinguisher may be pressurised. Do not expose

• Allow a skilled service engineer to depressurise damaged

• It is not permitted to make any modifications, e.g.

• Keep the fire extinguisher clean. Do not use any strong

• The fire extinguisher should only be used as a fire

• Do not expose it to direct sunlight or to the effects of the